JP2020130293A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance an interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine that executes variation display of identification information and can perform a control to an advantageous state advantageous to a player includes variation display execution means capable of executing variation display of identification information, includes a re-variation pattern for tentatively stopping identification information and variably displays the same again as an execution pattern of variation display. The variation display execution means may tentatively stop first special identification information or may tentatively stop second special identification information having a higher degree of expectation toward a control to the advantageous state than the first special identification information when executing the re-variation pattern. The first special identification information is tentatively stopped before starting a predetermined ready-to-win performance and is not tentatively stopped after starting the predetermined ready-to-win performance, and the second special identification information is sometimes tentatively stopped before starting the predetermined ready-to-win performance and is sometimes tentatively stopped after starting the predetermined ready-to-win performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9-9

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, when a gaming ball launched into a gaming area wins a prize in a predetermined winning opening, the identification information is variably displayed, and when the display result of the variable display becomes a display result indicating a big hit, an advantageous state advantageous for the player. Pachinko gaming machines that are controlled to (big hit gaming state) are known. In the variable display of the identification information, various effects such as reach effect and pseudo continuous effect are performed.

In the reach effect, for example, among a plurality of (for example, three) decorative symbols, a part (for example, two) decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the same or related symbols, and the remaining part (for example, one) is stopped and displayed. The decorative design of is a production that continues the variable display. Reach effects include, for example, normal reach and specific reach (eg, super reach) that is executed after normal reach and has a higher expectation of jackpot than normal reach.

Further, the pseudo-continuous effect is an effect in which the identification information is re-variable after the identification information that triggers the variable display (re-variation) is temporarily stopped and displayed. The identification information that triggers the re-variation is, for example, a specific decorative symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol).

Here, there is known a pachinko gaming machine that temporarily stops and displays a pseudo-continuous symbol during super reach and re-variates it (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-051230

However, there was room for improvement in order to enhance the interest in the configuration using a plurality of types of identification information that triggers re-change.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
A gaming machine that can execute variable display of identification information (for example, first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol, etc.) and control it to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state).
For example, a pachinko machine 1)
A variable display executing means (for example, a portion that executes steps S110 to 113 of the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing variable display of identification information is provided.
The execution pattern of the variation display includes a re-variation pattern in which the identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed again (for example, a variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous effect is performed).
When the variation display executing means executes the re-variation pattern, the first special identification information (
For example, when the weak pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH120) of FIG. 9-7 is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the first
The second special identification information (for example,) having a higher expectation of being controlled in the advantageous state than the special identification information.
There are times when the strong pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH220) of FIG. 9-8 is temporarily stopped and displayed.
The first special identification information may be temporarily stopped and displayed before the start of a predetermined reach effect (for example, weak super reach) (for example, the strong pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH220 of FIG. 9-7 (C)).
Temporary stop display), there is no time to temporarily stop display after the start of the predetermined reach effect,
The second special identification information is displayed when a temporary stop is displayed before the start of the predetermined reach effect (for example, a temporary stop display of the strong pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH220 of FIG. 9-8 (C)) and the predetermined reach. When the temporary stop is displayed after the start of the effect (for example, the strong pseudo-continuous symbol 0 in (E) of FIG. 9-9)
(Temporary stop display of 28SH220).

According to such a configuration, even if a configuration using a plurality of types of identification information that triggers re-variation, the first special identification information is not temporarily stopped and displayed after the start of a predetermined reach effect, so that the effect progresses. It is possible to suppress the production without a sense of expectation. Further, since it is possible to temporarily stop and display only the second special identification information after the start of the predetermined reach effect, it is possible to gradually develop the effect with a sense of expectation. As a result, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation that the game state is controlled after the start of the predetermined reach effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above
A production execution means (for example, a production control CPU 120) capable of executing the production is provided.
The effect executing means includes a first suggestion effect (for example, a weakening effect of FIG. 9-7 (B)) suggesting that the first special identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the second special identification information. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a strong fan effect of (B) in FIG. 9-8) that suggests that is temporarily stopped.
Before the start of the predetermined reach effect, the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect can be executed.
After the start of the predetermined reach effect, the first suggestion effect is not executed, and the second suggestion effect (
It is possible to carry out the strong fanning effect of FIG. 9-9 (D).

According to such a configuration, the first suggestion effect is not performed after the start of the predetermined reach effect.
It is possible to suppress excessive expectations of the player, and to temporarily stop and display the second special identification information after performing the second suggestion effect after the start of the predetermined reach effect, so that the effect has a sense of expectation. , It will be possible to develop in more stages. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above.
As the effects to be executed after the identification information is in the reach state, at least the first reach effect (for example, the normal reach shown in FIG. 9-8 (E)) and the effect executed after the first reach effect and said to be the first. Includes a second reach effect (for example, the weak super reach shown in FIG. 9-8 (F)), which is more expected to be controlled in the advantageous state than the first reach effect.
The predetermined reach effect is the second reach effect.

According to such a configuration, since the first special identification information is not temporarily stopped and displayed after the start of the second reach effect, it is possible to suppress an effect without a sense of expectation as the effect progresses. Further, since it is possible to temporarily stop and display only the second special identification information after the start of the second reach effect, the first reach effect → the second reach effect → the temporary stop display of the second special identification information, and so on. It will be possible to gradually develop the production with a sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (3) above
As an effect executed after the identification information is in the reach state, a third reach effect (for example,) that is executed after the second reach effect and has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the second reach effect (for example). Including the strong super reach) shown in (G) of FIG. 9-7.
When the first special identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed before the start of the second reach effect (for example, the temporarily stopped display of the weak pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH120 shown in FIG. 9-7 (C)), after the variable display is performed again. , The rate at which the identification information is stopped and displayed (the display result is derived and displayed at the end of the normal reach shown in FIG. 9-7 (E)) without executing the second reach effect executes the third reach effect. The identification information is stopped and displayed (for example, the display result is derived and displayed at the end of the strong super reach shown in FIG. 9-7 (H)) (as shown in FIG. 9-6, the fluctuation of the normal reach). Patterns "PA20-5 (loss)", "PB20-5 (big hit)" and weak super reach fluctuation patterns "PA20-6 (loss)", "PB20-6 (big hit)"
In the case of, the ratio of weak pseudo-continuous symbols determined is higher than that of strong pseudo-continuous symbols. ).

According to such a configuration, it can be suggested that when the first special identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed before the start of the second reach effect, it is difficult to develop into the third reach effect. That is, the first
By temporarily stopping the special identification information, it can be suggested that the jackpot expectation is low. Therefore, by not temporarily stopping and displaying the first special identification information after the start of the second reach effect, it is possible to prevent an effect that cannot be expected from the subsequent development of the effect from being performed as the effect progresses. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(5) In the gaming machine according to (3) or (4) above.
As an effect executed after the identification information is in the reach state, a third reach effect (for example,) that is executed after the second reach effect and has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the second reach effect (for example). Including the strong super reach) shown in (G) of FIG. 9-8.
When the second special identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed before the start of the second reach effect (for example, the temporary stop display of the strong pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH220 shown in FIG. 9-8 (C)), after the variable display is performed again. , The identification information is stopped and displayed by executing the third reach effect (for example, (for example, in FIG. 9-8).
The ratio of deriving and displaying the display result at the end of the strong super reach shown in H) is the second
The identification information is higher than the rate at which the identification information is stopped and displayed (the display result is derived and displayed at the end of the normal reach shown in FIG. 9-8 (E)) without executing the reach effect (as shown in FIG. 9-6, the strong supermarket is displayed). Fluctuation patterns that develop into reach "PA20-7 (loss)", "PA20-8 (loss)"
In the case of "PB20-7 (big hit)" and "PB20-8 (big hit)", the ratio of strong pseudo-continuous symbols determined is higher than that of weak pseudo-continuous symbols. ).

According to such a configuration, it can be suggested that when the second special identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed before the start of the second reach effect, it is likely to develop into the third reach effect. That is, the second
By temporarily stopping the special identification information, it can be suggested that the display is a variable display with a high expectation of a big hit. Therefore, by temporarily stopping and displaying only the second special identification information after the start of the second reach effect, it is possible to expect the subsequent development of the effect as the effect progresses. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (5) above.
The second special identification information is temporarily stopped before the start of the second reach effect (for example, FIG. 9-).
The temporary stop display (for example, the strong pseudo-continuous symbol shown in FIG. 9-9 (C)) is displayed after the start of the second reach effect, as compared with the case where the strong pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH220 shown in (C) of 8 is temporarily stopped. 02
The expectation that the advantageous state will be controlled is higher when the 8SH220 is temporarily stopped (temporary stop display).
As shown in FIG. 9-5, the production pattern "GS-1 (pseudo 2 times normal production)" when lost.
Is easy to determine, and it is difficult to determine the effect pattern "GS-3 (pseudo-twice normal effect)" at the time of a big hit. Further, it is easy to determine the effect pattern "GS-4 (pseudo 2 times special effect)" at the time of a big hit, and it is difficult to determine the effect pattern "GS-2 (pseudo 2 times special effect)" at the time of loss. ).
According to such a configuration, the temporary stop display of the second special identification information after the start of the second reach effect can be an effect with a high expectation of a big hit, and the first reach effect → the second reach effect → the second The development mode of temporarily stopping and displaying the special identification information can be the development mode with the highest expectation for a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect that gradually raises the expectation of the player. As a result, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation that the game state is controlled after the start of the predetermined reach effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of each big hit. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), and (C) Is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern determination table for small hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern determination table for detachment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the received command buffer at the time of a moving prize. (A) is a front view of a display monitor, (B) is a view showing a display mode of the display monitor, and (C) is an explanatory view of display contents. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration of a reception command buffer at the time of starting winning. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the random value value determination processing at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows a part of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the lookahead notice setting process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display pattern of the lookahead notice effect. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect determination processing in the rear variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, and (B) is a diagram showing the effect pattern of the jackpot suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. is there. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production pattern of the jackpot suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the production pattern of the setting suggestion effect. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect decision processing in front part variable display. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display when the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is decided, and (B) is the figure which shows the execution of the setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect in front variable display in the case, (C) is the figure which shows the effect pattern of the character effect and timer effect which is executed as suggestion effect in front variable display. (D) is a figure which shows the jackpot expectation degree of a character effect and a timer effect, and the execution expectation degree of a setting suggestion effect. (A) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the character effect, (B) is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the timer effect, and (C) shows the content of each effect pattern of the timer effect. It is a figure. It is a figure which shows the effect execution period in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the effect mode in the variable display of super reach. It is a figure which shows the execution decision ratio as the suggestion effect during front variable display of a character effect and a timer effect in a modification, and the execution expectation degree of a setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the hold memory display and the effect image in the modification. It is a figure which shows the execution period of the setting suggestion effect in the variable display of a normal reach, a non-reach without shortening, and a non-shortening non-reach in a modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of a series of productions in a feature part 028SH. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the variation pattern determination table for loss. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the variation pattern determination table for a big hit. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of an effect determination process in which the effect control CPU 120 relates to a pseudo continuous effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the effect pattern determination table of a pseudo continuous effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the temporary stop symbol determination table during the pseudo 1st change. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the screen transition of the pseudo 2 times normal effect that the weak pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the screen transition of the pseudo 2 times normal effect that a strong pseudo continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. The transition of a series of effects including the pseudo-continuous effect will be described. The transition of a series of effects including the pseudo-continuous effect will be described. It is a flowchart which shows the effect determination process (the second embodiment which concerns on the feature part 028SH) which the effect control CPU 120 concerns about a pseudo continuous effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the temporary stop symbol determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the strong fan production decision table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the screen transition of the pseudo 2 times special effect that a weak pseudo continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the right side of the game area), a variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. First to do
A special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. Special symbols include numbers indicating "0" to "9" and "
It is represented by a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). In addition, the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game,
Variable display of decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, "
The decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction or update display) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative symbol that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, there is a hold display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is held, and a hold display.
A display area for displaying the active display corresponding to the variable display during execution may be provided. Hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of on hold storage. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

In addition, a first hold indicator 25 configured to include a plurality of LEDs at a predetermined position on the game board 2
A and a second hold indicator 25B are provided, the first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the first hold indicator 25B according to the number of LEDs lit. The second reserved memory number is displayed.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example,
It is equipped with an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is close to the winning ball device 6A. It is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second start winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to the device including an electric tulip-type accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations below the left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area), the normal symbol display 2
0 is provided. As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passage gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is suspended, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L, 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are located at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3.
Is provided, and a game effect lamp 9 for a game effect is provided in the peripheral portion of the game area. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided at a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device. )
A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area. Stick controller 31
A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)

The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko game machine 1 by the player. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal map game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The general map game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol (a symbol that is out of the normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "out of the normal symbol".
Will be. When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7") is used as a confirmed special symbol.
, The actual design differs depending on the jackpot type described later. ) Is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "big hit", and when a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small hit". In addition, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, how to open the big prize opening (
A plurality of types of game states (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) after the big hit game state are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these.
As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big prize opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening (
High open control, high base control) is also executed. The time saving state is a special symbol (especially the second special symbol)
This is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the player is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number cut (time cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on, such as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is a low accuracy high base state,
The probabilistic state is also called the high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is also called the low-probability low-base state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. In addition, it should be noted
The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a point of the game effect lamp 9. Equal / extinguishing, operation of the movable body 32, etc. may be performed.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol )
Is also stopped and displayed (derived).

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (
For example, "6" etc.) may be displayed together as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example,""is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is"
It will be a small hit). As an example, "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5
The decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit game state in the same mode as small hit game state) and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach off") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach off"). In addition, when the display result is "off", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination that is not a big hit combination ("reach loss"). The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as "") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "out of reach").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and then the variable display is restarted to make one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high probability state and the low probability state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. Besides,
On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a game state, a small hit game state, a game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, and a solenoid circuit 111.
And so on.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 and a RAM (Random A).
ccess Memory) 102, CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and random number circuit 10
4 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, ROM10
Various data stored in 1 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). Controls (drives) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc.
It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal to be used, a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is
It is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )))
, The game status (for example, the start or end of variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision etc.). At this time, ROM
Various data (data such as various tables) stored in 121 is used, and RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 includes a controller sensor unit 35A or a push sensor 35.
The display control unit 123 may be instructed to execute the effect based on the detection signal from B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicating the operation content).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) and a CGROM (Character G).
Equipped with an enerator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., the effect is executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the effect image to the image display device 5 based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5.
To display. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or lamp signal (signal that specifies how to turn on / off the lamp)
Is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 has various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects.
Numerical data indicating is counted up to date. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3).
). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (
Step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, C
The PU 103 is an RA that clears the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102.
Perform M clear processing and set the initial value in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), the RAM
It is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.)
In addition, the state of the backup flag and the error detection code are also included. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. RAM1 with backup flag off
If the backup data is not stored in 02 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes),
The CPU 103 checks the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined by the parity bit or the checksum whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. If it is determined that these match, RAM10
It is determined that the data of 2 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), CP
The U103 performs a restoration process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command that specifies the time of recovery from the power failure, the image display device 5, for example, notifies that the image display device 5 has recovered from the power failure or is recovering from the power failure. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120
An appropriate screen display may be performed based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (.
Step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, the interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 10 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms).
It is sent to 3 and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 10
First, by executing a predetermined switch process, the detection signal from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 is transmitted via the switch circuit 110. Determining the presence or absence of reception (step S2
1). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22).
). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of times jackpots have occurred) and start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning or the like) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). CPU1
By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt, 03 manages the execution and hold of the special symbol game, controls the big hit game state and the small hit game state, controls the game state, and the like (for details, See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26).
). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, C
The PU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process processing, CPU103
First, the start winning determination process is executed (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold memory, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. Each process of the special symbol process process (steps S110 to S120)
), The transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

In the special symbol normal processing in step S110, the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value).
Is executed when. In this special symbol normal processing, the first is based on the presence or absence of pending information.
Whether or not to start the special figure game or the second special figure game is determined. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when it is set as "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or an outlier symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination values to be compared with the random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, the display result is "big hit" or "small hit".
It includes a process of determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types by using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of predetermining whether or not to set. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. The content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.) is specified, and it is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change process, the process of making settings for changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. And the display result is "big hit"
If, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is "8".
If the display result is "off", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "missing", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the big hit game state and setting the big winning opening to be open based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the open upper limit period for keeping the big winning opening in the open state and the upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like are used as the basis for the big winning opening. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the switch from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is "5".
On the other hand, when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is "
It is updated to 0 ”and the jackpot end process ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed elapses. here,
When the small hit game state ends, the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) are set. Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73).
). The timer interrupt flag is set for a predetermined time (for example, 2) based on the CTC register setting, for example.
It is set to the on state every time (milliseconds) elapses. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on,
The effect control CPU 120 is automatically set to disable interrupts, but when a CPU that is not automatically disabled is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is turned on in step S73 (step S73; Ye
s), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to turn it off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, the main board 1
After reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of 1 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, settings and controls corresponding to the read effect control commands are performed. It is said. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the RAM 1 may be stored so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like.
The reception flag provided in 22 is turned on. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the lookahead advance notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 may be, for example, a RAM 12
Depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in 2, the following steps S170 to S1
One of the 77 processes is selected and executed.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. Image display device 5
When it is determined to start the variable display of the decorative pattern in, the value of the effect process flag is set to ".
Update to 1 ”and end the variable display start waiting process.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120
By instructing the display control unit 123, the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 can be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, the movable body 32 can be driven, and the voice control board 13 can be driven. Speakers 8L, 8 by the output of the command (sound effect signal) to
During variable display of decorative symbols, such as outputting voice or sound effect from R, and turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 or decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14. Execute various production controls. After performing such production control
For example, in response to the fact that the end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or the command for specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative symbol is received from the main board 11, etc. The final decorative pattern that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the final decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".
During variable display, the effect processing ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120
For example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state is set, and various effect controls in the small hit game state are executed based on the set content. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. is there"
Update to 5 ”and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120
Sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the big hit middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the big hit game state is terminated. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120
Sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and executes various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but the game medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

What is displayed during the variable display of a special symbol is one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-").
The variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).
..

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as a game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) , Regular bonus, RT, AT
, ART, CZ (hereinafter, a slot machine equipped with one or more of bonuses, etc.)), the present invention can also be applied.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It may be a form of directly executing using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, the expression (“high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”, “high”
Expressions such as "low" and "differentiate") may include that one is in the proportion of "0%". For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".
(Explanation of feature section 153SG)

Next, with respect to the gaming machine in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, FIGS. 8-1 to 8-31.
Will be described with reference to.

First, FIG. 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, and shows the layout of the main members. As shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-3, the pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into an outer frame 153SG00 formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape.
It is composed of 1a, a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface, and a game machine frame (underframe) 153SG003 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area. Further, the game machine frame 153SG003 has a glass door frame 153 having a glass window.
SG003a is rotatably provided between a door opening position that opens the front surface of the gaming machine frame 153SG003 and a door closing position that closes the front surface, centering on the left side, and the glass door frame 153S.
The game area can be opened and closed by G003a, and the glass door frame 153SG003
When a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

Further, the game machine frame 153SG003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a game hall clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) and unlocking the door key, and the game machine frame 153 by players other than the clerk.
The SG003 and the glass door frame 153SG003a cannot be opened.

The left game area 153SG002L is a game area in which a game ball launched relatively weakly (left-handed) by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle 30 flows down, and the right game area 153SG002R
Is a game ball launched (right-handed) stronger than the game ball flowing down the left game area 153SG002L by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle 30, and the upper path 153SG0 of the image display device 5
It is a game area that passes through 02C and flows down.

Further, a general winning opening 10 is arranged in the left game area 153SG002L, and in the right game area 153SG002R, a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B, and a general winning ball device 6B are arranged from the upstream side to the downstream side of the right game area 153SG002R. A winning opening 10 and a special variable winning ball device 7 are arranged. That is, the game ball flowing down the left game area 153SG002L can win a prize in the first starting winning opening formed by the general winning opening 10 and the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 153SG002R is variable. It is possible to win a prize in the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, the general winning opening 10, and the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7, and it is possible to pass through the passing gate 41.

As shown in FIG. 8-1, a plurality of obstacle nails 153SGK1 are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. Therefore, the left game area 15
The game ball flowing down the 3SG002L cannot win the second start winning opening or the large winning opening, and the game ball flowing down the right game area 153SG002R cannot win the first starting winning opening.

In addition, the first reserved storage display area 1 is located at two locations on the left and right below the display area of the image display device 5.
53SG005D and the second hold storage display area 153SG005U are set. 1st
In the hold storage display area 153SG005D and the second hold storage display area 153SG005U, the hold storage display for identifiablely displaying the hold storage number (special figure hold storage number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-2 and 8-3, the main substrate 11 in the feature portion 153SG of the present embodiment is a substrate case 153SG201 which is configured to be openable by the first member and the second member.
It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being stored in. Further, on the main board 11,
Lock switch 1 for switching the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a changeable set value change state
53SG051, the setting changeover switch 153SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing the setting value such as the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) described later in the set value change state, and the opening that detects the opening of the game machine frame 153SG003. The sensor 153SG090 is provided. Although the details will be described later, the set value change state in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment is a state in which a clerk of the game hall or the like can confirm the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value confirmation state). ).

The setting switching main body portion provided with an operation unit that can be operated by the player such as the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting changeover switch 153SG052 is housed in the board case 153SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting changeover switch 153SG052. Is exposed to the back side through an opening formed in the back surface of the substrate case 153SG201 so that it can be operated without opening the substrate case 153SG201.

Since the board case 153SG201 having the lock switch 153SG051 and the setting changeover switch 153SG052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming machine frame 15
The operation is extremely difficult when the 3SG003 is closed, and the operation can be performed by opening the game machine frame 153SG003 using a predetermined door key. Also, lock switch 153SG
Since 051 requires the operation of the setting key owned by the clerk of the amusement park or the like, only the clerk who possesses the setting key can operate the 051. Further, the lock switch 153SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later by a setting key. Although the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys, one key may be used in combination.

Further, in the board case 153SG201, a display monitor 153SG029 capable of displaying a set value and a base value described later is arranged. The display monitor 153SG029 is a main board 1
It is connected to 1 and is arranged on the upper part of the substrate case 153SG201. That is, the display monitor 153SG029 is the main board 11 in the board case 153SG201.
It is placed in front of you when you see. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized when the gaming machine frame 153SG003 is not opened, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized is the back surface side of the gaming board 2 when the gaming machine frame 153SG003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognized, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front surface when the main board 11 is visually recognized and the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 and 8-2, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a predetermined position (for example, a lower left position of the gaming area) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment. 1 First special symbol display device 153SG004A capable of variable display of 1 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display device 153SG004B capable of variable display of 2nd special symbol, 1st hold display capable of displaying 1st reserved storage number Device 153SG025A, 2nd hold display 153 capable of displaying the 2nd hold storage number
SG025B, normal symbol display 153SG020 capable of variable display of normal symbol, normal figure hold display 153SG025C capable of displaying the number of normal symbol hold storage, and the number of rounds (big hit type) of the big hit game can be displayed during the big hit game. Round display 153SG131, right-handed lamp 153SG132 that lights up in the game state where a game ball such as a high base state (time saving state) or a big hit game state is launched toward the right game area 153SG002R, and a probability change lamp 153SG133 that lights up in the probability change state. A game information display unit 153SG200 is provided in which the time-saving lamps 153SG134 that are lit in the high base state (time-saving state) are collectively arranged.

1st special symbol display device 153SG004A and 2nd special symbol display device 153SG004B
Each consists of 8-segment LEDs. Further, in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B, if the variable display result of the special symbol is off or a small hit, the variable display result can be derived and displayed by a common combination. ing.

In the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display device 153SG004A has two types of big hit symbols (lighting L) for each big hit type.
Variable display results and derivation display are possible with the combination of ED). Further, in the case where the variable display result is a big hit in the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol display device 15
The 3SG004B is capable of variable display results and derivation display with two types of jackpot symbols (combination of lit LEDs) for each jackpot type.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the first special symbol display device 153SG0
The jackpot symbols that can be derived and displayed are all different between 04A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B, but the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the jackpot symbol that can be derived and displayed by the second special symbol display device 153SG004B can be derived and displayed. At least a part of the big hit symbol may be duplicated.

In the first hold indicator 153SG025A and the second hold indicator 153SG025B, LEDs of four segments are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. These first hold indicators 1
In 53SG025A and the second hold indicator 153SG025B, if the number of hold storage is one, only the LED at the left end lights up, and each time the number of hold storage increases, it is the second from the left and the third from the left.
The third and fourth LEDs from the left are turned on in sequence. Then, each time the variable display is executed, the hold memory is reduced (consumed), and the LE on the hold display corresponding to the variable display is used.
D turns off in a predetermined shift direction (to the left in the feature portion 153SG of the present embodiment).

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when both the first special figure holding memory and the second special figure holding storage exist, the variable display based on the second special figure holding storage is preferentially executed. It has become like. Therefore, for example, when there is one 1st special figure hold memory and 2 2nd special figure hold memories (only the LED at the left end of the 1st hold indicator 153SG025A is lit and the 2nd hold is on. When the two LEDs on the left of the display 153SG25B are lit)
Is executed after the number of the second special figure hold memory becomes 0 by the execution of the variable display based on the second special figure hold memory, and then the variable display based on the first special figure hold memory is executed.

Further, the round display 153SG131 is composed of five segments (LEDs). As the jackpot types in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, a total of three jackpot types are provided: a jackpot A which is a 5-round jackpot, a jackpot B which is a 10-round jackpot, and a jackpot C which is a 15-round jackpot. Therefore, which segment of the segments constituting the round display 153SG131 is lit differs depending on the jackpot type.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And LED control commands used to control the lighting operation of decorative LEDs and the like are included.

It should be noted that the effect control board 12 in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment has the first movable body 153SG321 and the second movable body 153SG321 that can operate between the origin position and the effect position during variable display and the like.
The movable body 153SG322 and the first movable body 153SG321 are the first movable body 153SG32.
Origin detection sensor 153SG331 that can detect that it is located at the origin position of 1, and the second
An origin detection sensor 153SG332 capable of detecting that the movable body 153SG322 is located at the origin position of the second movable body 153SG322 is connected to the movable body 153SG322.

FIG. 8-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 153SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 8-4 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first special symbol display device 15.
This is the first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in 3SG004A. Command 8002H is the second special symbol display device 153.
This is the second variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in SG004B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a fluctuation pattern specification command that specifies a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. still,
In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". ) Or, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is set when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4 (B), the command 8C0
0H is the first variable display result designation command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. Command 8C02H has a variable display result of "big hit" and a big hit type of "big hit".
This is the third variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result of "big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state in which the time reduction control is performed (the game state (low base state, normal state)).
This is the second game state specification command corresponding to the high base state and time saving state).

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormal) and the type of the error (abnormal) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Error (abnormal)
With the specified command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is possible to specify which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by the error notification process described later.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.
The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. .. In the notification command while the big winning opening is open and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, different EXT data is set according to the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "15") in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Will be done.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 153SG004B has been satisfied.
It is a start opening prize designation command.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to display the special figure hold storage number identifiable on the image display device 5 or the like. Command C
The 2XXH is a second display device 5 or the like for identifiable display of the number of reserved special figures.
This is the second hold storage number notification command for notifying the special figure hold storage number. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are the first start condition and the second hold storage number notification command.
When any of the start conditions is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the transmission may be performed in response to the start of execution of the special figure game.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (commands for designating a winning determination result) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" and the judgment result of the big hit type (probability change, non-probability change, etc.) as the judgment result at the time of winning. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category indicating a determination result of whether the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is the variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. It is a command.

The command D0XXH transfers the newly set set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (
This is a setting value designation command for designating the effect control CPU 120). Command E10
1H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (recovery of power failure, also referred to as hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has cleared the contents of the RAM 102 and started (cold start).

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and is a ROM that stores a game control program, fixed data, and the like.
(Read Only Memory) 101 and a RAM (Random A) that provides a work area for game control.
ccess Memory) 102 and a CPU (Ce) that executes a game control program to perform control operations.
The ntral Processing Unit) 103, the random number circuit 104 that updates the numerical data indicating the random number value independently of the CPU 103, the I / O (Input / Output port) 105, and the real-time clock (RTC) that can output time information. ) 106.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 is the ROM 10
By executing the program read from No. 1, the process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. Variable data read operation, CPU 103 I
A reception operation that accepts inputs of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via / O105, a transmission operation that the CPU 103 outputs various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the like. Will be done.

FIG. 8-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11.
As shown in FIG. 8-5, in the feature unit 153SG of this embodiment, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern on the main board 11 side. Numerical data indicating each of the random value MR3 for determination, the random value MR4 for determining the display result of the general map, and the random value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, random values other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random values MR1-
The MR5 may be counted by software update using a different random counter in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

In the present embodiment, each random value MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 8-5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each random value is not limited to this. The range of MR1 to MR5 may be different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 8-6 shows the fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol corresponds to each of the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", and is variable. Display result is "big hit"
A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to such a case. Further, 1 variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to a case where the variable display result is a “small hit”.
The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The variable display result is "
The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case of "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, the normal reach α, the normal reach β, ... A plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-6, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment is the super reach fluctuation pattern, super reach α and super reach β. Is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is The special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the variable display result is set to be "big hit" in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach, so that the big hit expectation is set to be high. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into, for example, non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, and the like. Rather than determining the variation patterns to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined types after the determination is made first, the determination is made using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided for determining the variation pattern type. The type of the fluctuation pattern may be determined first from the random value of the above, and then the fluctuation pattern to be executed may be determined from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-6, the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the fluctuation content (effect content) is predetermined for each fluctuation pattern, but the present invention illustrates this. The variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value, even if the variation pattern is the same. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 out of normal reach, if the set value is 1, the fluctuation pattern is out of normal reach, and if the set value is 2, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. As a fluctuation pattern that is executed twice and becomes non-reach out of reach, when the set value is 3, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed three times to make a fluctuation pattern that is out of super reach.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and by using the RAM 102 as a work area, various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are executed. Also, CPU10
In No. 3, all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side can be generated by executing the random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-7 to 8-11, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations and determinations. Further, the ROM 101 contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. A fluctuation pattern table or the like that stores a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, the first special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), the second special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), and FIG. -8
In addition to the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in (A) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table and the small hit variation pattern A determination table, a deviation pattern determination table, a general map display result determination table (not shown), a general figure variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. More specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing described later, the jackpot winning probability (ball output rate) is changed by using the display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. .. The set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. In other words, as for the set value, 6 which is the largest value is the most disadvantageous value for the amusement park side, and the smaller the value in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is the more advantageous value for the amusement park side. Become.

8-7 (A) and 8-7 (B) are explanatory views showing a display result determination table. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is an MR.
It is a table in which the hit determination value to be compared with 1 is set for each set value. In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as the display result determination table, individual display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , The display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, which is a numerical value that can be taken with
1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the gaming state is a probabilistic state, 1020 to 1 of the above-mentioned hit determination values
Up to 346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result,
1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the gaming state is a probabilistic state, 1020 to 1 of the above-mentioned hit determination values
Up to 346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, which is a numerical value that can be taken with
1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the gaming state is a probabilistic state, 1020 to 1 of the above-mentioned hit determination values
Up to 383 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, which is a numerical value that can be taken with
1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the gaming state is a probabilistic state, 1020 to 1 of the above-mentioned hit determination values
Up to 383 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, which is a numerical value that can be taken with
1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33594 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the gaming state is a probabilistic state, 1020 to 1 of the above-mentioned hit determination values
Up to 429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, which is a numerical value that can be taken with
1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the gaming state is a probabilistic state, 1020 to 1 of the above-mentioned hit determination values
Up to 429 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result,
1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the gaming state is a probabilistic state, 1020 to 1 of the above-mentioned hit determination values
Up to 487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, which is a numerical value that can be taken with
1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the gaming state is a probabilistic state, 1020 to 1 of the above-mentioned hit determination values
Up to 487 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, which is a numerical value that can be taken with
1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the gaming state is a probabilistic state, 1020 to 1 of the above-mentioned hit determination values
Up to 556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, which is a numerical value that can be taken with
1020 to 1317 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the gaming state is a probabilistic state, 1020 to 1 of the above-mentioned hit determination values
Up to 556 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, which is a numerical value that can be taken with
1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the gaming state is a probabilistic state, 1020 to 1 of the above-mentioned hit determination values
Up to 674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33094 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

As shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, which is a numerical value that can be taken with
1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the gaming state is a probabilistic state, 1020 to 1 of the above-mentioned hit determination values
Up to 674 are assigned to "big hits", 32767 to 33421 are assigned to "small hits", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing".

As described above, in each display result judgment table, the game state is a probability change state (high probability state).
When is, more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state),
It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state)
When the probability is determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state (in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the set value is 1, the set value is 1/300, and the set value is 2.
In the case of 1/280, when the set value is 3, 1/260, when the set value is 4, 1/240,
Compared to 1/220 when the set value is 5 and 1/200 when the set value is 6, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state is higher (this). In the feature unit 153SG of the embodiment, when the set value is 1, it is 1/200, and when the set value is 2, it is 1/2.
180, 1/160 when the set value is 3, 1/140 when the set value is 4, 1/120 when the set value is 5, 1/100 when the set value is 6.). That is, in each display result determination table, the probability that when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), it is determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the normal state or the time saving state. Is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state so that the determination value becomes high.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-7, the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state is different depending on each set value (for example, setting). If the value is 1, the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.5 times, and if the setting value is 2, the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is The magnification is about 1.56 times, and if the set value is 3, the magnification of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state or the time saving state is 1.625 times). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the multiplication factor of the jackpot probability in the probability variation state with respect to the jackpot probability in the normal state and the time saving state at each set value is set to be constant (for example, 5 times). May be good.

Further, in each of the first special figure display result determination tables, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned as follows. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (A),
In the display result determination table for the first special figure, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is set to 1/200 regardless of the game state or the set value. There is.

On the other hand, in each of the second special figure display result determination tables, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the first regardless of the game state or the set value.
Judgment values are assigned so that they have the same value as the display result judgment table for special figures. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value. The probability of being determined to control the game state is set to 1/100.

It should be noted that the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be different depending on the set value. Further, the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" and the small hit gaming state is different according to the variable special map. The invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit gaming state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be the same probability regardless of the variable special figure.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to the "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result judgment table, the display result for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. In the determination table, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit").
In the case of the set value 2 to the set value 6, 12 so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.
The numerical range corresponding to each set value from 38 is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.
The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, 0 to 0
Of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 65535, the common numerical range (1020 to 1237)
) Is assigned to "Big hit", but if the set value is 2 or more, the number in the range of the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range is "" It is assigned to "big hit". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range is 1 as the value of the set value increases.
It will increase based on 238.

Therefore, the jackpot probability uses 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value).
As the set value increases, the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases, and the value increases.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range of 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 3276 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6.
Since it is set in the range of 7 to 33094, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit").
In the case of the set value 2 to the set value 6, 13 so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.
The numerical range corresponding to each set value from 47 is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.
The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535 when the set value is 1. Of the hit judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the big hit judgment values is set. Numerical values within the range including the non-common numerical range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability uses 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value).
As the set value increases, the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases, and the value increases.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33094 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1 of the hit determination values is described as described above.
While 020 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, the small hit judgment value is 32767 in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Is the reference value of the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value), 32767 ~
Since it is set in the range of 33094, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit").
In the case of the set value 2 to the set value 6, 12 so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.
The numerical range corresponding to each set value from 38 is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.
The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, 0 to 0
Of the hit judgment values that can take values in the range of 65535, the common numerical range (1020 to 1237)
) Is assigned to "Big hit", but if the set value is 2 or more, the number in the range of the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range is "" It is assigned to "big hit". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range is 1 as the value of the set value increases.
It will increase based on 238.

Therefore, the jackpot probability uses 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value).
As the set value increases, the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases, and the value increases.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is to determine the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value of. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 3276 with 32767 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6.
Since it is set in the range of 7 to 33421, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

Next, in the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 102 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit").
In the case of the set value 2 to the set value 6, 13 so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.
The numerical range corresponding to each set value from 47 is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.
The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the set value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the set value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for the set value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for FIG. 2 when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, when the set value is 1, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the judgment values, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the big hit judgment values are not included in the common numerical range. Numerical values within the range including the common numerical value range are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1347 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability uses 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value).
As the set value increases, the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases, and the value increases.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the probabilistic state, the hit determination value is the same as the display result determination table for the second special figure when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state. Of these, the range from 32767 to 33421 is set to the common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining the small hit regardless of the set value. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, 1 of the hit determination values is described as described above.
While 020 to 1674 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, the small hit judgment value is 32767 in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1674) in the case of the set value 6. Is the reference value of the small hit judgment value (small hit reference value), 32767 ~
Since it is set in the range of 33421, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

As described above, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, in each display result determination table, regardless of the game state and the set value, the common numerical range or the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range are set based on the hit determination value 1020. The judgment value included in the continuous numerical range of 1 is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the continuous numerical range of 1 is based on the hit judgment value 32767 regardless of the game state and the set value (common). The variable display result is judged by using the judgment value included in the numerical range) as the numerical range of the small hit judgment value.

Further, in each of these display result judgment tables, when the fluctuation special figures are the same, the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is the same regardless of the game state (the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value is Same). In addition, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure (small in the display result judgment table for the first special figure). While the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the hit judgment value is 328, the number of judgment values included in the numerical range of the small hit judgment value in the display result judgment table for the second special figure is 655.
On the other hand, the numerical range of the small hit determination value itself is set to 32767 as a reference value (small hit reference value).

Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, there is a probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as the "big hit". Judgment values are assigned so that the lower the value and the larger the value of the set value, the higher the probability that the special figure display result will be determined to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state as "big hit" (big hit probability: set value 6> set value). 5> Set value 4> Set value 3> Set value 2> Set value 1).

That is, when the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time and the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot,
It is decided to make a big hit (big hit A to big hit C) for a special symbol. Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 8-7 indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 153SG004A or the second special symbol display device 153SG004B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit game state, but the first special symbol display device 153SG0
It also means that it is determined whether or not the stop symbol in the 04A or the second special symbol display device 153SG004B is a small hit symbol.

The feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment provides a total of six set values, 1 to 6, as set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

8-8 (A) and 8-8 (B) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. Is. Of these, FIG. 8-8 (A) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table when you do. Further, FIG. 8-8 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second starting winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is variably displayed). It is a table of cases.

In the jackpot type determination table, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot type is selected from jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine.

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 8-9. In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type, the jackpot A (also referred to as non-probability variable jackpot) in which only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state to shift to the low probability high base state, and the jackpot game After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and the jackpot B and the jackpot C (also referred to as the probabilistic jackpot) that shift to the high-accuracy high-base state are set.

The jackpot game state by "big hit A" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "B" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. Furthermore, the jackpot game state by "big hit C" is
15 rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous for the player (
(So-called 15 rounds), a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed.

The time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "big hit A" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Figure Ends when the game is in a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot B or the jackpot C are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state is continuous without going through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs in.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is 2. There may be less than one type, or four or more types.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (A), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), 0 to 99 out of the range 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2 is assigned to the jackpot A. 100 to 249 are assigned to jackpot B, and 250 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-8 (B), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), 0 to 0 in the range of the determination value of MR2 0 to 299
Up to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 199 are assigned to jackpot B, and 200 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the winning opening in which the game ball has won is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. , The jackpot type is determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the jackpot type is determined by using MR2 which is a random number value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is not limited to this. It may be determined using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

Further, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the variation pattern can be selected from the plurality of types described above according to the predetermined determination result. Determine to one of the fluctuation patterns of.

Specifically, as the fluctuation pattern judgment table, the fluctuation pattern judgment table for big hits used when it is predetermined to set the variable display result to "big hit" and the variable display result to be "small hit". The jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table used when it is determined in advance and the deviation pattern judgment table used when it is decided in advance that the variable display result is "off" are prepared in advance. ing.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation patterns of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) are used. On the other hand, a predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value.

As shown in FIGS. 8-10 (A) and 8-10 (B), as the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (big hit A) used when the jackpot type is jackpot A. (For big hit) and the big hit fluctuation pattern judgment table (for big hit B and big hit C) used when the big hit type is for big hit B and big hit C are prepared in advance, and these big hit fluctuation pattern judgment tables (for big hit C) are prepared in advance. The fluctuation pattern judgment table for (for A) and the jackpot (for jackpot B and jack C) shows the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1).
), Super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), Super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3), random value M for determining the fluctuation pattern.
A predetermined random number value within the range that R3 can take is assigned as a determination value.

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot A), 1 to 400 of the MR3 determination value ranges 1 to 997 are normal reach jackpot variation patterns (PB1). -1) is assigned, and 401 to 850 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot, and 851 to 997.
Are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C), 1 to 200 of the range of MR3 determination values 1 to 997 are fluctuations in the normal reach jackpot. It is assigned to the pattern (PB1-1), and 201 to 550 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot, 55.
1 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot.

Further, in the fluctuation pattern determination table for small hits, the fluctuation pattern of small hits (PC1)
A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as a determination value to the variation pattern of -1). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, the range of determination values of MR3 is 0 to 9.
Of the 97, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit fluctuation pattern (PC1-1). The variation pattern of the small hit in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment is PC1.
Although only -1 is provided, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more fluctuation patterns may be provided as the fluctuation pattern of the small hit.

Further, the deviation pattern determination table includes the deviation pattern determination table A used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time reduction control, and the low base. The deviation pattern determination table B used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and the deviation variation used when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state. A pattern determination table C and a variation pattern determination table D for deviation used when the game state is a high base state in which time reduction control is performed are prepared in advance.

In the deviation pattern determination table A, the non-reach deviation variation pattern without shortening (PA1-1), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), the super reach α deviation variation pattern (PA2-2), and the super A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the variation pattern (PA2-3) out of reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), in the deviation pattern determination table A (for low-base medium total hold storage number of 1 or less), 1 to 4 of the range of determination values of MR3 1 to 997.
Up to 50 are assigned to non-reach out-of-reach variation patterns (PA1-1), 451
~ 700 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) out of normal reach, 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach β. Fluctuation pattern (PA2-3)
Is assigned to.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super Fluctuation pattern of reach α off (PA2-2),
A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (B), in the deviation pattern determination table B (for 2 to 4 total pending storage numbers in the low base), 1 to 997 of the determination value ranges of MR3 5
Up to 00 is assigned to the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2), 501
~ 700 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) out of normal reach, 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach β. Fluctuation pattern (PA2-3)
Is assigned to.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super Fluctuation pattern of reach α off (PA2-2),
A predetermined random number value within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take is assigned as the determination value to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (C), in the deviation pattern determination table C (for low-base medium total pending storage number of 5 or more), 1 to 5 out of the range 1 to 997 of the determination value of MR3.
Up to 50 are assigned to non-reach out-of-reach variation patterns (PA1-3), 551.
~ 700 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) out of normal reach, 701 to 900 is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach β. Fluctuation pattern (PA2-3)
Is assigned to.

Further, in the deviation pattern determination table D, the shortening non-reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4) and the normal reach deviation variation pattern (PA1-4) corresponding to the time reduction control are performed.
PA2-1), fluctuation pattern out of super reach α (PA2-2), fluctuation pattern out of super reach β (PA2-3), a predetermined disturbance within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern can take. A numerical value is assigned as a judgment value.

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (D), in the deviation pattern determination table D (for high base medium), 1 to 550 of the judgment value ranges 1 to 997 of MR3 are non-reach deviation variations. It is assigned to the pattern (PA1-4), and 551 to 700 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-1) out of normal reach, and 701 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-2) out of super reach α. Assigned to 901-99
Up to 7 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PA2-3) out of super reach β.

As described above, when the deviation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio for determining the non-reach variation pattern and the normal reach variation pattern is set higher than the ratio for determining the super reach variation pattern. In addition, the variation pattern determination tables A to D for disconnection
When is used, regardless of the fluctuation pattern judgment table, 701 to 900 of the judgment values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α deviation, and 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β deviation, that is, When the variable display result is out of alignment, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined by a common determination ratio, so that it is possible to prevent the effect from being deteriorated due to the variable display based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach not being executed. it can.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α deviation and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the deviation of the super reach β are completely the same between the set values as the deviation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α outlier and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the outlier of super reach β are between each set value. By a small margin (for example, 1%)
Degree) may differ.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the variable display result is out of alignment, the embodiment in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. If the variable display result is out of order, the determination ratios of all the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same, and
Only the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of either the non-reach or the normal reach may be the same.

The fluctuation time of the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and further, the fluctuation pattern (PA1-2).
The fluctuation time of the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-3) is shorter than that of (Fig. 8-6).
reference). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4. By winning a start when the player is in the game, it becomes difficult for a useless start-up prize that is not stored on hold to occur, and when the number of stored memories is reduced, the fluctuation time is long and the non-reach is out of reach. By determining the pattern (PA1-1),
By lengthening the variable display time, it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the variable display not being executed.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 (A) to 8-11 (C), the variation is made by using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the total number of reserved storages. Although the form of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of reserved memories in the special symbol to be changed (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the first The variation pattern may be determined using a variation pattern determination table for deviation, which differs depending on the number of reserved memory of the special symbol and the number of reserved memory of the second special symbol when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

Further, the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which there is a one-to-one correspondence between whether or not to execute the reach effect and which reach effect is to be executed for each determined fluctuation pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not the effect control CPU 120 executes the reach effect based on the special figure variation time of the variation pattern, the variable display result, and the like.
You may decide which reach effect to execute by lottery.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8-1 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as the special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game.

Next, the display of the display monitor 153SG029 in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 8-12 (A), the display monitor 153SG029 is the first display unit 153S.
It includes G029A, a second display unit 153SG029B, a third display unit 153SG029C, and a fourth display unit 153SG029D. 1st display unit 153SG029A to 5th display unit 153
The SG29E is composed of 7 segments each of which is composed of 7 segments drawing a "8" shape, and dots arranged on the lower right side of the 7 segments. The first display unit 153SG029A to the fifth display unit 153SG29E have various colors, respectively.
For example, it can be lit and blinked in red, blue, green, yellow, white, etc. It is also possible to display different colors or so-called rainbows while changing these colors in an extremely short cycle.

The display control of the display monitor 153SG029 in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment is executed by using the areas not subject to the test in the entire areas of the ROM 101 and the RAM 102 during the test of the pachinko gaming machine 1. ..

As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (B) and 8-12 (C), the display monitor 153SG029 has a base value calculated in a normal state (low accuracy and low base state) for each out 6000 balls in all game states. Base L, which is a (real-time value during measurement), and base 1, which is a base value calculated in a normal state (low accuracy and low base state) for each of the first out 6000 balls in all game states, and
Base 2 which is the base value calculated in the normal state (low accuracy low base state) for each of the second out 6000 balls in all game states, and the normal state (low accuracy low base state) for each third out 6000 balls in all game states. It is possible to display the base 3 which is the base value calculated in the low base state). Base L, base 1, base 2, and base 3 are displayed at a percentage of the display monitor 153SG.
It is displayed at 029.

When the base L is actually displayed on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 153SG029A and "L." is displayed on the second display unit 153SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "bL." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value ("00""
~ "Value of" 99 ") is displayed on the third display unit 153SG029C and the fourth display unit 153SG029D. When displaying the base 1 on the display monitor 153SG029,
In order to display the abbreviation "b1." Of the base, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 153SG029A.
, "1." is displayed on the second display unit 153SG029B, and the upper two digits (values of "00" to "99") of the calculated value are the third display unit 153SG029C and the fourth display unit 153S.
It is displayed with G029D. When the base 2 is displayed on the display monitor 153SG029, the first display unit 153SG is used to display the abbreviation "b2." Of the base.
"B" is displayed on 029A, "2." is displayed on the second display unit 153SG029B, and the upper two digits (values of "00" to "99") of the calculated value are the third display unit 153SG029C and the fourth.
It is displayed on the display unit 153SG029D. When the base 3 is displayed on the display monitor 153SG029, "b" is displayed on the first display unit 153SG029A and "3." is displayed on the second display unit 153SG029B in order to display the abbreviation "b3." Is displayed, and the upper two digits of the calculated value (values from "00" to "99") are displayed in the third display unit 153SG.
It is displayed on 029C and the fourth display unit 153SG029D.

In the display monitor 153SG029 of the present embodiment, the control of sequentially displaying the base L, the base 1, the base 2, and the base 3 is executed by the control of the main board 11 (CPU103). For example, the main board 11 executes control to switch the display of the display monitor 153SG029 in the order of base L → base 1 → base 2 → base 3 at 5-second intervals. still,
The display color of each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Specifically, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "1", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in white, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set. When it is "2", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in blue, and when the set value set on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "3", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in yellow. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in green, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "4". If it is "5", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in red, and if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "6", each base value on the display monitor 153SG029 is displayed in purple. indicate. Therefore, the clerk of the amusement park can specify the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 only by checking the display color of the display monitor 153SG029 without the CPU 103 executing the setting value changing process described later. ing.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 8-2 has an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation, for example, for effect control as shown in FIG. 8-13 (A). A data holding area 153SG190 is provided. The effect control data holding area 153SG190 shown in FIG. 8-13 (A) is the effect control flag setting unit 153SG.
191 and effect control timer setting unit 153SG192 and effect control counter setting unit 153S
It includes a G193 and an effect control buffer setting unit 153SG194.

The effect control flag setting unit 153SG191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 153SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 153SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 153SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 153SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 15
Data indicating a count value in each of a plurality of types of counters is stored in the 3SG193.

The effect control buffer setting unit 153SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 153SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the data constituting the start winning command buffer 153SG194A as shown in FIG. 8-13 (B) is the effect control buffer setting unit 15.
It is stored in a predetermined area of 3SG194. Received command buffer at start winning 153SG19
In 4A, a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer numbers “1-1” to “1-4”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “4”) of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage, and A storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display is provided. Further, the start winning command buffer 153SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2" to correspond to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage.
An area corresponding to "2-4") and a storage area corresponding to the second special figure during variable display (area corresponding to the buffer number "2-0") are provided. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, and the variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 153SG194A are the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage separately is secured in association with the hold storage number notification command.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) are stored when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started.
As will be described later, the contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are shifted to the higher rank one by one, and the storage contents are changed. It is cleared in the decorative symbol fluctuation stop processing executed when the display is finished.

Further, the command buffer 15 received at the time of starting winning in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment
In the 3SG194A, each storage area (entry) is a storage area of the hold display flag in which a flag value is set according to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold storage display in the lookahead advance notice setting process (FIG. 8-18) described later. It is secured every time.

In the hold display flag, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold storage display is stored when the execution of the hold display notice effect is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process described later. As a result, when the hold storage display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D and the second hold storage display area 153SG005U, and the execution of the hold display notice effect is decided. Is a special mode that is different from the normal display mode (
For example, "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) or special mode (for example, blue or red) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold memory display of the square (◇) or star (☆)). By setting "3" (blue camera) or "4" (red camera) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold memory display of (camera), the hold memory display in a mode different from the normal display mode can be displayed. It is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 153SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 153SG005U, and in the variable display corresponding to the reserved storage display, there is a possibility of a big hit or a super reach, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 It is foretold that there is a high possibility that a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value is executed.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 153SG194A. Then, at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 153SG194A. I will go. At the time of starting winning, the start opening winning designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , Design specification command, Variable category specification command,
It will be stored in the order of the hold storage number notification command.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. 8-13 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variation display that ended immediately before each time the variation display of the decorative symbol is started. The entry (entry with the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2") is deleted. The stored contents of the entries after the hold storage of the variable display that starts are shifted from those stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIG. 8-13 (B), each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted and the buffer number is deleted. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is shifted to the buffer number "1".
Each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". To. Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variablely displayed at that time.

Next, the game control main process in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-14 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (153SG).
Sa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (153SGSa002). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (107SGSa003) and whether or not the RAM 102 (backup RAM) is normal (107SGSa004). When backup data is not stored (1)
53SGSa003; N) or when RAM 102 is not normal (153SGSa004; N)
) Goes to 153SGSa017, where backup data is stored and RAM
If 102 is normal (153SGSa003; Y, 153SGSa004; Y),
Further, whether the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6, that is, the RAM.
It is determined whether or not the set value of the normal value is stored in 102 (153SGSa005).
..

When the set value stored in the RAM 102 is not any of 1 to 6 (153 SGS)
a005; N) proceeds to 153SGSa017, and when the set value stored in the RAM 102 is any of 1 to 6 (153SGSa005; Y), the set value change process described later is being executed before the power failure. It is determined whether or not the setting value changing flag indicating that (the power failure occurred during the execution of the setting value changing process) is set (153SGSa006).
When the setting value changing flag is set (153SGSa006; Y), 153S
Proceed to GSa017, and if the setting value changing flag is not set, RAM described later
If the RAM clear flag indicating that the clear process has been executed is set, the RAM clear flag is cleared (153SGSa007), and whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, pachinko while the clear switch is being operated. It is determined whether or not the game machine 1 has been activated (153SGSa008).

When the clear switch is ON (153SGSa008; Y), the RAM clear flag is set to proceed to 153SGSa011 (153SGSa010), and when the clear switch is OFF (153SGSa008; N), 153SGSa010 is not executed and 153SGSa010 is set. move on.

In 153SGSa011, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa011). When the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa011; Y), it is further determined whether or not the release sensor 153SG090 is ON (153SGSa012). When the release sensor 153SG090 is ON, that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started with the lock switch 153SG051 ON and the gaming machine frame 153SG003 open (153SGSa012; Y), the RAM clear flag is set. Judgment whether or not (153SGSa013a)
..

When the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa013a; Y), the set value change process (153SGSa) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1
013b) is executed to proceed to 153SGSa013d, and when the RAM clear flag is not set (153SGsa013a; N), the set value confirmation process (153SGsa013c) for confirming the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed. Run 153SG
Proceed to Sa013d.

In the set value change process (153SGSa013b), the CPU 103 first displays the set value currently set on the display monitor 153SG029. Next, every time the setting changeover switch 153SG052 is operated, the setting value is updated and displayed on the display monitor 153SG029. Then, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 153SG029 is updated and stored in the RAM 102 based on the fact that the lock switch 153SG051 is turned off, and the setting value newly updated and stored in the RAM 102 can be specified. The command is output to the effect control CPU 120.

Further, in the set value confirmation process (153SGSa013c), the CPU 103 displays the set value currently set on the display monitor 153SG029. Then, the display of the set value on the display monitor 153SG029 may be terminated based on the fact that the lock switch 153SG051 is turned off.

When the lock switch 153SG051 is OFF in 153SGSa011 (
153SGSa011; N) or when the open sensor is OFF (153SGSa012;
N) is 153S without executing the processing of 153SGsa013a to 153SGSa013c.
Proceed to GSa013d.

In 153SGSa013d, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set, that is, whether or not the RAM 102 is cleared (whether or not the RAM clear process (153SGSa009) is executed) when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started this time ( 153
SGSa013d). When the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa01)
3d; Y) is 153SGS after executing the RAM clear processing (153SGSa013e).
Proceed to a014 and when the RAM clear flag is not set (153SGSa013)
d; N) is 153SGSa0 without executing the RAM clear process (153SGSa013e).
Proceed to 14.

In the RAM clear process (153SGSa013e), the CPU 103 executes a process of setting "00H" to all addresses except the address where the set value is stored and the address where the RAM clear flag is stored (set). .. That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, 153SGSa001 to 153SGSa013e and 153 described later.
As shown in SGSa017 to 153SGSa021, when there is no abnormality in the RAM 102, the contents of all the addresses except the address where the set value is stored and the dress where the RAM clear flag is stored are cleared.

In 153SGSa014, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag is set again (153SGSa014). When the RAM clear flag is set (153SGSa014; Y), the process proceeds to 153SGSa022, and when the RAM clear flag is not set (153SGSa014; N), the internal state of the main board 11 is stopped (power cut). Performs recovery processing to return to the state of (153SGSa015).

In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be. And CPU103
Assuming that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in the state before the power failure, sends a recovery command including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and 1
Proceed to 53SGSa028 (153SGSa016).

Further, in 153SGSa017, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the clear switch is ON, that is, whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated while the clear switch is being operated (153SGSa017). When the clear switch is ON (153SG
Sa017; Y) further indicates whether or not the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SG).
Sa018) and determine whether or not the open sensor 153SG090 is ON (153S).
GSa019).

When the lock switch 153SG051 is ON (153SGSa018; Y) and the release sensor 153SG090 is ON, that is, there is no backup data in the RAM 102, the RAM 102 is not normal, or a normal setting value is not set. However, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a formal procedure by the operation of an employee of the game hall (the game machine frame 153SG003 is opened and the lock switch 153SG051 is turned on, the pachinko game is operated while operating the clear switch. When the machine 1 is started), the set value stored in the RAM 102 is cleared (153SGSa020), and if the set value changing flag is set, the set value changing flag is cleared (153SGSa021). Then, the above-mentioned processes of 153SGSa009 to 153SGSa016 are executed.

When the clear switch is OFF (153SGSa017; N), the lock switch 1
When 53SG051 is OFF (153SGSa018; N), the open sensor 153S
When G090 is OFF (153SGSa019; N), the process proceeds to 153SGSa031.

Further, in 2078SGSa022, the CPU 103 transmits a recovery command including a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12 on the assumption that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start (153SGSa022). Then, a cold start notification timer is set according to the period for notifying the cold start of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (153SGSa023), and the cold start notification is started by starting blinking of all segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029. (153SGSa024
).

After executing 153SGSa024, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the cold start notification timer by -1 (153SGsa025), and determines whether or not the cold start notification timer has timed out (153SGSa026). If the cold start notification timer is not out of timer (153SGSa026; N), 153SGSa025 and 153SGS
When the process of a026 is repeatedly executed and the cold start notification timer timers out (153SGsa026; Y), the blinking of all segments on the display monitor 153SG029 ends (153SGsa027), and the process proceeds to 153SGSa028.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the display monitor 153SG0 is used for a period (for example, 5 seconds) of the cold start notification timer at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1.
Although the embodiment in which all the segments constituting 29 are blinked is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display monitor 153SG is used at the time of calling and starting the pachinko gaming machine 1.
Only a part of all the segments constituting 029 may be blinked, or at least a part of all the segments constituting the display monitor 153SG029 may be turned on.

Then, in 153SGSa028, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process (153SGSa028) that initially sets the random number circuit 104, and causes the game control microcomputer 100 to periodically interrupt the timer at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). Set the built-in CTC register (153SGSa029) and allow interrupts (15).
3SGSa030). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

Further, in the 153SGSa031, the CPU 103 refers to the effect control board 12 based on the fact that an abnormal setting value is stored in the RAM 102 (setting value abnormality error) and that the CPU 103 recovers from the power failure during the setting change described later. And sends an error specification command according to the abnormality of the set value (153SGSa031). In addition, set the error notification execution wait timer (
153SGSa032). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the error notification execution waiting timer to −.
1 (153SGSa033), and it is determined whether or not the error notification execution waiting timer has timed out (153SGSa034). If the error notification execution wait timer is not out of the timer (153SGSa034; N), 153SGSa033 and 153SGSa03
When the process of 4 is repeatedly executed and the timer for waiting for error notification execution times out (153)
SGsa034; Y) is the first display unit 153S constituting the display monitor 153SG029 as a notification (error notification) of the occurrence of a setting value abnormality error or recovery from a power failure during setting change.
"E." is displayed in each of G029A, the second display unit 153SG029B, the third display unit 153SG029C, and the fourth display unit 153SG029D (153SGsa035).
..

In addition, the CPU 103 blinks all the LEDs constituting the first special symbol display device 153SG004A and the second special symbol display device 153SG004B (153SGS).
a036), a security signal is output to a management device such as a management computer of the game hall via a terminal board (not shown) provided in the pachinko game machine 1, and 153SGSa032.
Proceed to (153SGSa037). After that, the CPU 103 continues until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off (until the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off by the operation of a clerk at the game hall) 15
By repeatedly executing the processes of 3SGSa032-153SGSa037, the display monitor 153SG029, the first special symbol display device 153SG004A, and the second special symbol display device 1
The error occurrence notification by 53SG004B is executed.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment has a display monitor 15 when an abnormal set value is set or when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power failure during the change of the set value.
3SG029, 1st special symbol display device 153SG004A, 2nd special symbol display device 153
Since the SG004B is used to notify the occurrence of an error, the clerk at the amusement park recognizes that the pachinko game machine 1 has recovered from the occurrence of an error or the power failure while changing the set value from both the front side and the back side. It is possible. In addition, the occurrence of an error in the pachinko game machine 1 and the recovery from the power failure while changing the set value can be recognized by the management device of the game hall, so that the security of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. It has become.

In the game control main process of the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-14, when it is determined in 153SGSa008 that the clear switch is ON (15).
3SGSa008; Y) and 153SGSa021 exemplify a mode in which the RAM clear process (153SGSa009) is executed after clearing the setting value changing flag, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear process is not limited to this. , 153SGSa008 when it is determined that the clear switch is ON (153SGSa008; Y) or 15
Not after clearing the setting value changing flag in 3SGSa021, but 153SGSa
When it is determined that the RAM clear flag is set in 014 (153SGSa)
It may be executed at 014; Y).

FIG. 8-15 is a flowchart showing a start winning determination process (S101) executed by the CPU 103 in the special symbol process process shown in FIG. CP in the start winning judgment process
The U103 is first provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A.
Based on the detection signal from the start port switch 22A, it is determined whether or not the first start port switch 22A is on (153SGS101). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (153SGS101; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (153SGS101; Y). For example, it is determined whether or not the upper limit storage number is "4") (153SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved memory number by reading, for example, the first reserved stored number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved stored number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown). 153SGS1
In 02, when the number of reserved first special figure is not the upper limit value (153SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "1".
Is set to (153SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in 153SGS101 or (153SGS)
101; N), when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in 153SGS102 (153SGS102; Y), the second start winning opening provided by the variable winning ball device 6B is provided. 2 Second start port switch 2 based on the detection signal from the start port switch 22B
It is determined whether or not 2B is on (153SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (153SGS104; Y), the second special figure reserved storage number, which is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value (153SGS104; Y). For example, "4" as the upper limit storage number
”) Is determined (153SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown). In 153SGS105, when the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value (153SGS)
105; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2" (153SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of 153SGS103 and 153SGS106, the number of special figure hold storages corresponding to the starting port buffer value, which is the stored value of the starting port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (153SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first
While the hold storage count value is added by 1, when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (153SGS108). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is a stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the process of 153SGS108, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit (not shown). Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for the purpose and the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination is extracted (153SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (153S).
GS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit (not shown), while when the start port buffer value is "2". , Numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit (not shown).

Numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variation display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. The CPU 103 executes the process of the 153 SGS 109.
Numerical data indicating all of the random value values used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variable display time is extracted.

Following the processing of the 153SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting port winning designation command according to the starting port buffer value is performed (153SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the ROM
By storing the storage address of the second start opening prize designation command table in 101 in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, the setting for transmitting the second start opening prize designation command to the effect control board 12 is made. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

Following the processing of 153SGS111, the random value determination processing at the time of winning is executed (153SGS).
112). After that, for example, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. (153SGS113). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Will be done.

After executing the process of 153SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (153SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1", (1)
After clearing the Y) start port buffer with 53SGS114 and initializing the stored value to "0" (153SGS115), the process proceeds to 153SGS104. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 153 SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (S116), and then the start winning process is performed. finish.
As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 8-16 (A) shows the 153SGS112 of FIG. 8-15 as the winning random number value determination process.
It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process executed in. Feature unit 153S of the present embodiment
In G, when the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol is started, the special symbol normal processing (
According to S110) in FIG. 5, whether or not to control the special figure display result (variable display result of the special symbol) to the big hit game state as "big hit" and the special figure display result to control to the small hit game state as "small hit". Judgment such as whether or not to do is performed. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (S111 in FIG. 5), the determination of the variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is performed.
On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing of the 153SGS112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). Therefore, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the special symbol display result, whether or not it is determined that the small hit symbol is derived and displayed as the special symbol display result, and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol. Determines whether or not is in the predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. As a result, it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, at the start of the variable display. The special figure display result will be "big hit" or "small hit" before
It is determined which category the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is, and based on this determination result, the effect control CPU 120 or the like executes the hold display notice effect as described later. Become.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 8-16 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in, for example, a game control flag setting unit (not shown), thereby pachinko. Identify the current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 (153S
GS121). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probability change state when the probability change flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probability change flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are off. Sometimes it is sufficient to identify the normal state.

Following the processing of 153SGS121, the display result determination table shown in FIG. 8-7 is selected and set (153SGS122). At this time, the CPU 103 has a start port buffer value of 1.
If, the display result determination table for the first special figure shown in FIG. 8-7 (A) is set, and if the start port buffer value is 2, the display result for the second special figure shown in FIG. 8-7 (B) is set. The judgment table may be set.

After that, referring to the numerical range of the jackpot (judgment range of the jackpot) according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the set display result determination table, 153S in FIG. 8-15.
It is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted by GS109 is within the jackpot determination range (153SGS123). The jackpot judgment range is 1
In the display result determination table selected by the processing of 53SGS122, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" are set, and the CPU 103 compares the random number value MR1 with each determination value one by one. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating a minimum value (lower limit value) and a maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. By comparing, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, since it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, the variation display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is "big hit".
It can be determined that it is determined.

If it is determined by the 153SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot is not achieved during variable display (153SGS123; N), it is set to the pachinko game machine 1 in the set display result determination table. With reference to the numerical range of small hits (judgment range of small hits) according to the set value, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted by 153SGS109 in FIG. 8-15 is It is determined whether or not it is within the small hit determination range (153SGS124). The small hit judgment range is 153SGS122
In the display result judgment table selected by the process of, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" are set, and the CPU 103 compares the random number value MR1 with each judgment value one by one. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the small hit judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random value MR1 and the minimum value or the maximum value of the small hit judgment range. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the small hit determination range by comparing with. At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the small hit determination range,
It can be determined that the variation display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "small hit".

When it is determined by the 153SGS124 that it is not within the small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the small hit does not occur at the time of variable display (153SGS124; N), the variable display result becomes "missing". Execute the transmission setting of the symbol specification command (153SGS)
125), it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is set, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (153SGS126). If the time reduction flag is not set (153SGS126; N), select and set the deviation pattern determination table A (153SGS126; N).
153SGS127), if the time saving flag is set (153SGS126; Y
), Select and set the deviation pattern determination table D (153SGSS128)
).

As shown in FIG. 8-11 (A), the deviation pattern determination table A is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 1 or less. Further, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (D), the deviation pattern determination table D is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the gaming state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed. is there.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, in addition to the deviation pattern determination table A and the deviation pattern determination table D, the deviation used when the total number of reserved storages is 2 to 4. The variation pattern determination table B for deviation and the variation pattern determination table C for deviation used when the total number of reserved storages is 5 to 8 are prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. 8-11, these are out of alignment. Of the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, in the deviation pattern determination table A, a value from 0 to 450 within the range that the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination can take is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern. In the deviation pattern determination tables B and C, a value exceeding 0 to 450 is assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. On the other hand, in the deviation pattern determination tables A to C, values from 701 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach within the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take.

Therefore, in the 153 SGS 132 described later, the deviation pattern determination table A
By determining the variation pattern (variation category) using, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always a non-reach or super reach variation pattern even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination. In the time judgment, the deviation pattern judgment table A
It is designed to be judged using.

As shown in FIG. 8-16 (A), when the 153SGS123 determines that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot during variable display (153SGS).
123; Y), the jackpot type is determined based on the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (1).
53SGS130). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the fluctuation special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that composes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

Further, the transmission setting of the symbol designation command according to the jackpot type determined in the 153SGS130 is executed (153SG131), and the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern to any one of a plurality. Set (15
3SG132).

Further, when it is determined by the 153SGS124 that the small hit is within the small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the small hit is obtained during the variable display (153SGS124; Y), a symbol designation command corresponding to the small hit type is transmitted. Execute the setting (153SG129).

153SGS127, 153SGS128, 153SGS129, 153SGS132
After executing any of the processes of 153SGS127, 153SGS128, 153
Using the variation pattern determination table set in the processing of SGS129 and 153SGS132 and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination, the variation category according to the range of the determination values including the random number value MR3 is determined. (153SGS133). In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (B), when at least the variable display result is “off”, the “non-reach” is common regardless of the total number of reserved memories. Variable categories that are variable display modes, variable categories that are variable display modes of "super reach", and "others" that are variable display modes other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach and small hits) It suffices if a variable category is provided and it can be determined whether or not the variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, after making a setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the processing of 153SGS132 to the effect control board 12 (153SGS134).
, Ends the random value judgment process at the time of winning.

FIG. 8-17 shows the effect control process process (S7) in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment.
It is a part of the flowchart of 6). In the effect control process process in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, after the pre-reading advance notice setting process (S161) shown in FIG. 7 is executed, it is displayed in the first reserved storage display area 153SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 153SG005U. After executing the hold display update process of updating the display mode and the number of display of the hold storage display according to the start winning command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. 8-13 (B), FIG.
The process of any of S170 to S177 shown in the above is executed.

FIG. 8-18 is a flowchart showing a lookahead advance notice setting process (S161) executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 8-17. In the lookahead advance notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the contents of the start winning command buffer 153SG194A shown in FIG. 8-13 (B) (153SGS241), and there is an entry in which the hold display flag is not set. Judge whether or not (153SGS242
). If there is no entry for which the hold display flag is not set, the read-ahead notice setting process is terminated. Determine if there is an entry set (153SG
S243).

If there is already an entry with the hold display flag value set to any of 1-4
That is, if the hold display notice effect has already been executed, the entry (153SGS24).
Set "0" corresponding to non-execution of the hold display notice effect to the hold display flag of the hold display flag of the entry determined in 2 that the hold display flag is not set (that is, the hold storage display corresponding to the entry is set to "○". (Determined to display with) and end the look-ahead notice setting process (153SG
S251). As will be described later, the case where there is an entry in which the value of the hold display flag is already set to any of 1 to 4 is the case where the hold display notice effect has already been executed. That is, in the process of 153SGS243, when the hold display notice effect is already executed, the execution of the new hold display notice effect is restricted.

In the 153SGS243, the effect control CPU 120 has 1 to 1 of the hold display flag values.
If there is no entry set in any of 4, the entry (153SGS24)
It is determined whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry in which the hold display flag is not set in 2) indicates a big hit (153SGS244). When the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a jackpot, the jackpot type is specified from the symbol designation command of the entry (153SGS245), and extracted from, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 153SG193. Hold display Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the notice effect and the jackpot type specified in 153SGS245, by referring to the jackpot hold display notice effect determination table (not shown), the presence / absence of execution of the hold display notice effect and the hold display Determine the display pattern when executing the advance notice effect (153)
SGS246).

In 153SG246, for example, whether or not to execute the hold display advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 8-19 (A). FIG. 8-19 (A)
In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in (1), the presence / absence of the hold display advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are different depending on the jackpot type specified in the processing of 153SGS245.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the display pattern (notice type) of the hold display notice effect.
As, four types of display pattern α, display pattern β, display pattern γ, and display pattern δ are provided. Of these, when the display pattern of the hold display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the hold storage display is a white square (◇) and the first hold storage display area 153SG.
When it is displayed in 005D or the second hold storage display area 153SG005U and the display pattern of the hold display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold storage display is a white star (
☆) In the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold storage display area 153
When it is displayed on SG005U and the display pattern of the hold display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern γ, the hold storage display is a blue camera and the first hold storage display area 153SG005D.
Alternatively, when the display is displayed in the second hold storage display area 153SG005U and the display pattern of the hold display notice effect is determined to be the display pattern δ, the hold storage display is a red camera and the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold Storage display area 153SG005U
Is displayed in. When it is decided not to execute the hold display notice effect, the hold storage display is displayed in a white circle (◯) in the first hold storage display area 153SG005D or the second hold storage display area 153SG005U.

Here, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (A), when the jackpot type is jackpot A (non-probability variable jackpot), non-execution of the hold display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and a rate of 55%. The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern α is decided, the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 20%, and the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 10%. Is decided, and the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is decided at a rate of 10%. In addition, when the jackpot type is jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variation jackpot), non-execution of the hold display notice effect is determined at a rate of 5%, and the hold display notice effect with the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 20%. Execution is decided, execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 55%, execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 10%, and 1
The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%.

Returning to 153SGS244, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the variation category from the variation category specification command of the entry (153SGS248) when the symbol designation command of the entry is a miss or a small hit, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the effect control. Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the hold display notice effect extracted from the random counter of the counter setting unit 153SG193 and the big hit type specified in 153SGS249, refer to the hold display notice effect determination table at the time of small hit / miss (not shown). By doing so, it is determined whether or not the hold display notice effect is executed and the display pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (B), when the variable display result is out of alignment and the variable category is non-reach, the non-execution of the hold display notice effect is determined at a rate of 95%. 5%
The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern α is decided at the ratio of 0%, the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at the ratio of 0%, and the hold display in the display pattern γ is decided at the ratio of 0%. The execution of the notice effect is decided, and the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is decided at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is out of order or small hit and the variable category is other (when the normal reach is out of order or small hit), it is decided that the hold display notice effect is not executed at a rate of 75%, and 20%. The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern α is decided by the ratio, and the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided by the ratio of 5%.
The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is determined at a rate of%, and the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, when the variable display result is out of alignment and the variable category is super reach, it is decided that the hold display notice effect is not executed at a rate of 55%, and the hold display notice effect in the display pattern α is determined at a rate of 25%. Execution is decided, 1
The execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern β is decided at a rate of 0%, the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern γ is decided at a rate of 5%, and the execution of the hold display notice effect in the display pattern δ is decided at a rate of 5%. The execution of the hold display notice effect is decided.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 8-19 (A) and 8-19 (B), the feature portion 1 of the present embodiment
In 53SG, when the hold display notice effect is executed, it is controlled to the jackpot game state at a higher rate than when the hold display notice effect is not executed, and the hold display notice effect is set by the display pattern β. Is executed, the jackpot type is set to be jackpot B or jackpot C (probability variation jackpot) at a higher rate than when the hold display notice effect is executed in the display pattern α. With such a setting, if the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type),
The ratio of the jackpot type being the probabilistic jackpot is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed, and the player's expectation of becoming the probabilistic jackpot can be increased.

Since the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ are display patterns that suggest the execution of the setting suggestion effect described later, the degree of expectation that the display pattern α and the display pattern β are controlled to the big hit game state (big hit expectation). Is not set to be high, and the degree of expectation (probability variation big hit expectation) that the big hit type is big hit B or big hit C is the same.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the fluctuation patterns that can be determined when the variable display result is a big hit are the fluctuation patterns of normal reach and super reach, and FIGS. 8-19.
As shown in the above, the case where the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ is determined is the case where the variable display result is a big hit or the variable display result is out of order and the variable category is super reach. That is, it is also suggested that the hold storage display of the display pattern γ and the display pattern δ (a mode of the blue or red camera) is a variable display of super reach that can execute the setting suggestion effect described later. On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 8-19 (B), the variable categories are non-reach and others (
In the case of normal reach or small hit), that is, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than the super reach, the hold memory display is not displayed in the form of a blue or red camera.

Returning to FIG. 8-18, the effect control CPU 120 is 153SGS246 or 153SG.
After executing the process of S249, it is determined whether or not it is decided to execute the hold display notice effect (153).
SGS250). If it is decided to execute the hold display notice effect, the hold display flag of the entry is set to a value (any of 1 to 4) corresponding to the display pattern determined by the processing of 153SGS246 or 153SGS249 and read ahead. End the notice setting process (153S
GS247). If it is decided not to execute the hold display notice effect, the hold display flag of the entry is set to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the hold display notice effect, and the lookahead notice setting process is terminated ( 153SGS251).

FIG. 8-20 shows the variable display start setting process (variable display start setting process) in the effect control process process shown in FIG.
It is a flowchart which shows S171). In the variable display start setting process, C for effect control
The PU 120 first determines whether or not the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS271). When the first variable start command reception flag is set (153SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer (not shown) are set. Various command data and various flags stored in association with each other (that is, various command data and various flags corresponding to the first special symbol being variably displayed) in the 1st to 4th 1st special figure hold storage The corresponding command data and various flags) are shifted upward by one buffer number (153SGS2).
72). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in the 153SGS271 (153SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273). If the second variable start command reception flag is not set (153SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated.
When the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (153SGS273; Y)
, Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer (not shown)
That is, various command data and various flags corresponding to the second special symbol being displayed in a variable manner,
The 1st to 4th second special figure holding storage (various command data and various flags) are shifted upward by one buffer number (153SGS274). The buffer number "2"
The content of "-0" is deleted because it cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing 153SGS272 or 153SGS274, the effect control CPU 120
Read the variation pattern specification command from the variation pattern specification command storage area (153S)
GS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (153SGS).
276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do.

In the feature unit 153SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols as even symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination of the aligned decorative symbols (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", "11", " Combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", "999")
Decide from among. In addition, the fourth variable display result specification command received corresponds to jackpot C.
In the case of the variable display result specification command, the combination of the decorative symbols (big hit symbol) in which the three symbols are aligned with "7" is determined as the stop symbol. In addition, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the chance eye indicating that it is a small hit as a stop symbol (third symbol is under a specific rule). "3"
34 ”,“ 556 ”,“ 778 ”, etc.). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes. (Out of design) is decided.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a stop symbol determination table in which random numbers for determining stop symbols are extracted and data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (153SGS277). If the variable display variation pattern is not the super reach variation pattern, the process proceeds to 153SGS285. If the variable display variation pattern is the super reach variation pattern, the rear variable display suggestion effect is displayed during the variable display reach effect. Is executed (153SGS278), which determines whether or not to execute, and which effect is to be executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect. That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, 153SG
As shown in S277 to 153SG278, the rear variable display suggestion effect (big hit suggestion effect or setting suggestion effect) can be executed only in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach with a long special figure fluctuation time, and the special figure fluctuation time. It is not executed in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of normal reach or non-reach with short.

In the variable display of the super reach in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment,
As shown in FIG. 8-28, the variable display result is a big hit as a suggestion effect during the front variable display from the start timing of the variable display. The character effect or the variable display result suggested by the character displayed on the image display device 5. It is possible to execute a timer effect that suggests that is a big hit and suggests the period until the start of execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, and as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display during the reach effect that is the latter half of the variable display. It is possible to execute a jackpot suggestion effect suggesting that the variable display result is a jackpot or a setting suggestion effect suggesting a set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, 153SGS278
Is a process of determining whether or not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect and whether to execute the jackpot suggestion effect or the setting suggestion effect during the reach effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the rear variable display suggestion effect (either the jackpot suggestion effect or the setting suggestion effect) is determined in the process of the 153SGS278 (153SGS279). If it is decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of 153SGS278, the process proceeds to 153SGS285. The front variable display suggestion effect determination process for determining whether to execute the character effect or the timer effect as the variable display suggestion effect is executed (153SGS280). That is, the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment does not determine the execution of the front variable display suggestion effect unless the execution of the rear variable display effect is determined, that is, the setting suggestion effect cannot be executed. In the variable display of reach and normal reach, the timer effect and the character effect are not executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the character effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display (153SGS281). When it is decided to execute the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the period until the start of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is set in the timer for waiting for the suggestion effect during the rear variable display (as shown in FIG. 8-28 (A)). Set the value according to (5 seconds after the start of the reach production) and proceed to 153SG285 (153SGS282),
When it is decided to execute the timer effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the period until the start of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display on the timer waiting for the suggestion effect start during the rear variable display (as shown in FIG. 8-28 (B)). , Value according to the effect pattern of the timer effect (Specifically, if the effect pattern of the timer effect is the pattern TS-1 which is the effect period of 25 seconds, the effect of the timer effect is 5 seconds after the start of the reach effect. If the pattern is the pattern TS-2, which is the production period of 30 seconds, 10 seconds after the start of the reach production)) is set and the process proceeds to 153SGS285 (153SG).
S283).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the fluctuation pattern in the 153 SGS 285. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (153SGS286).
).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like are each process data n.
They are arranged in chronological order in association with (1 to N).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the content of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1).
, Lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1), and an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, various lamps as an effect component, and a speaker 8L as an effect component, 8R, control of the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (153SGS287). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting / extinguishing of various lamps. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 153SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (153SGS288). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (153SGS289). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Every time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal, whereby variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is realized. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (153 SGS290).

FIG. 8-21 is a flowchart showing a suggestion effect determination process (153SGS278) during the rear variable display in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 8-20. In the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process shown in FIG. 8-21, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 8-13 (B).
The value of the hold display flag corresponding to the variable display is specified with reference to the start winning command buffer 153SG194A shown in (153SGS301). In this process, when the first variable display start command reception flag is set, the value of the hold display flag of the entry of "1-0" of the start winning command buffer 153SG194A is specified, and the second variable is displayed. When the display start command reception flag is set, the entry of "2-0" in the start winning command buffer 153SG194A may be specified.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the rear variable display suggestion effect is executed and the effect to be executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect based on the value of the hold display flag specified in the 153SGS301 (153SG302).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-22 (A), when the value of the hold display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "0", that is, the hold display notice effect is executed for the variable display. If not, 90% of the respondents decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect, 10% decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, and 0% decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect. Set as a suggestion effect during variable display Determines to execute the suggestion effect. Also, 1
When the value of the hold display flag specified in 53SGS301 is "1" or "2", that is, the hold storage display is displayed as a white square or a star as a hold display notice effect for the variable display. In that case, the non-execution of the rear variable display suggestion effect is decided at a rate of 50%, the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect is decided at a rate of 50%, and the rear variable is performed at a rate of 0%. Set as a suggestion effect during display Determines to execute the suggestion effect.

Further, when the value of the hold display flag specified in 153SGS301 is "3",
That is, when the hold memory display is displayed by the blue camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, it is decided at a rate of 30% that the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is not executed.
At a rate of 35%, the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the rear variable display suggestion effect, and at a rate of 35%, the execution of the set suggestion effect is determined as the rear variable display suggestion effect. And 153S
When the value of the hold display flag specified in GS301 is "4", that is, when the hold storage display is displayed by the red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, it is 0%. Decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the rear variable display at a rate, decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display at a rate of 30%, and set the suggestion as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display at a rate of 70%. Decide the execution of the production.

That is, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the hold display notice effect is executed for the variable display, it is more than when the hold display notice effect is not executed for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined at a high rate. Further, when the hold storage display is displayed by the blue or red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display (the value of the hold display flag is "3" or "4".
”), When the hold storage display is displayed as a white square or star as a hold display notice effect for the variable display (the value of the hold display flag is“ 1 ”or“ 2 ””. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is decided at a higher rate than (when), and the hold memory display is a white square or star as a hold display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than when it is displayed in the form.

In addition, pay attention to the case where the hold storage display is displayed by the blue or red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display (when the value of the hold display flag is "3" or "4"). Then, if the hold storage display is displayed on the red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, the hold memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. The camera is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined at a higher rate than when it is displayed, and the hold memory display is blue as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. It is set so that the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display at a higher rate than the case where it is displayed in.

From the above, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the hold memory display is displayed in a quadrangle or a star shape as a hold display notice effect for the variable display, it is used as a suggestion effect during the rear variable display. While it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the jackpot suggestion effect is executed, the hold memory display is displayed by the blue or red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. In that case, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display.

Furthermore, if the hold storage display is displayed on the red camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display, the hold memory display is displayed on the blue camera as the hold display notice effect for the variable display. Since the ratio of the setting suggestion effect being executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect is higher than the case where the setting suggestion effect is executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect, the game is further played. It is possible to draw people's attention.

Returning to FIG. 8-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is determined in the process of the 153SGS 302 (153SGS303). 15
If it is decided not to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of 3SGS302, the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process is terminated, and if it is decided to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of 153SGS302, further. , 153SGS 302 determines whether or not the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display (153SGS).
304).

When it is decided to execute the jackpot suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect in the processing of the 153 SGS 302, the effect pattern of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the rear variable display suggestion effect determination process is performed. Finish (153SGS305).

As an effect pattern that can be determined in the processing of 153 SGS 305, FIG. 8-22
As shown in (B), a total of three effect patterns from pattern AS-1 to pattern AS-3 are provided. Among these effect patterns, pattern AS-1 is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: low) suggesting that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit (big hit expectation) is the lowest, and pattern AS-2 is It is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: medium) that suggests that the ratio of the variable display result to a big hit is higher than that of the pattern AS-1, and the pattern AS-3 has the highest ratio of the variable display result to a big hit. It is a production pattern (big hit expectation: high) that suggests that it is high.

Then, in the above-mentioned processing of 153SGS305, as shown in FIG. 8-23, when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect pattern of the big hit suggestion effect is changed to the pattern AS-1 at a rate of 10%. Is determined to be pattern AS-2 at a rate of 30%, and pattern AS-3 is determined at a rate of 60%.

On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display in the processing of the 153SGS 302, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the RAM 122 and the CPU 10
The set value (set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) is specified from the set value designation command received from 3 (153SGS306). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines and stores the effect pattern of the setting suggestion effect based on the specified set value, and ends the suggestion effect determination process during the rear variable display (153SGS307).

As the effect patterns that can be determined in the 153SG 307, as shown in FIG. 8-22 (B), a total of five patterns from the pattern SS-1 to the pattern SS-5 are provided. Of these patterns SS-1 to pattern SS-5, pattern SS-1 suggests that the set value may be an odd number (for example, 1, 3, 5), and pattern SS-2 has an even number of set values (for example, 1, 3, 5). For example, the pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility of 2, 4, 6), and the pattern SS-3 suggests the possibility that the set value is equal to or higher than the intermediate setting (for example, 3 or 5) closer to the odd number. Suggests that the set value may be greater than or equal to the even-numbered intermediate setting (eg, 4 or 6), and pattern SS-5 suggests that the set value may be the highest setting (eg, 6).

The patterns SS-1 and SS-2 are determined at a high rate when the set value is any of 1 to 4 (low setting), and therefore, any of the set values 5 and 6 (high setting). It is said that the degree of expectation is low, and for pattern SS-3 and pattern SS-4, when the set value is either 5 or 6, it is determined at a high rate, so that the set value 5 and It is said that the expectation of being 6 is high.

In the feature unit 153SG, the set values 1 to 4 are set as low settings and the set values 5 and 6 are set as high settings, but the set values 1 to 3 may be set as low settings and the set values 4 to 6 may be set as high settings. And set values 1, 2
May be set to a low setting, setting values 3 and 4 may be set to an intermediate setting, and setting values 5 and 6 may be set to a high setting to set the execution rate of the effect pattern.

In the processing of the above-mentioned 153SGS307, as shown in FIG. 8-24, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect pattern at a ratio of 60% to the pattern SS-. Determined to be 1, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 25%, pattern SS-3 at a rate of 9%, pattern SS-4 at a rate of 6%, 0
The pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of%. If the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 25%, and 60%.
The pattern SS-2 is determined at the ratio of, the pattern SS-3 is determined at the ratio of 6%, the pattern SS-4 is determined at the ratio of 9%, and the pattern SS-5 is determined at the ratio of 0%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 50%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and 20 The rate of% determines the pattern SS-3, the rate of 10% determines the pattern SS-4, and the rate of 0% determines the pattern SS-5.

If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4, the effect pattern is set to 2.
Pattern SS-1 is determined at a rate of 0%, pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 50%, and 1
Pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of 0%, pattern SS-4 is determined at a rate of 20%, and 0
The pattern SS-5 is determined at a rate of%. When the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 5, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 20%, and 30%.
Pattern SS-2 is determined at a rate of 30%, pattern SS-3 is determined at a rate of 30%, and 20%.
The pattern SS-4 is determined at the rate of, and the pattern SS-5 is determined at the rate of 0%. Also,
When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 6, the effect pattern is determined to be pattern SS-1 at a rate of 30%, pattern SS-2 at a rate of 20%, and 15%. The ratio determines the pattern SS-3, the ratio determines the pattern SS-4, and the ratio determines the pattern SS-5.

As described above, in the feature unit 153SG, it is suggested that the set value is one of 1 to 4 by executing the set value suggestion effect in the pattern SS-1 or the pattern SS-2, and the set value suggestion is made. The set value is 5 when the effect is executed in pattern SS-3 or pattern SS-4.
Or it is suggested to be 6. Then, when the setting suggestion effect is executed in the pattern SS-5, it is confirmed that the set value is 6.

8-25 shows the effect control CPU 12 in the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 8-20.
It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion effect determination process (153SGS280) in front variable display which 0 executes. CP for effect control in the suggestion effect determination process during variable front display shown in FIG. 8-25
The U120 first identifies the variable display result of the variable display (153SGS311). In addition, it is determined whether or not the execution of the setting suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display (153SGS312).

If the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is decided as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the presence or absence of the execution of the front variable display suggestion effect and the suggestion during the front variable display based on the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect and the variable display result. The effect to be executed as the effect is determined from the character effect and the timer effect (153SGS313). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, it is decided at a rate of 40% that the suggestion effect during the front variable display is not executed, and 30%.
The execution of the character effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, and the execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display at a rate of 30%. If the variable display result is out of order, 70% of the time, 70% of the time, the non-execution of the front variable display suggestion effect is decided, and 25% of the time, the character effect is decided as the front variable display, the suggestion effect. Then, at a rate of 5%, the execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display.

That is, when the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is out of order. The execution of the suggestion effect is determined, and if the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the character effect and the execution of the timer effect are determined at the same ratio as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, while the variable display result. If is off, the execution of the character effect is determined at a higher rate than the execution of the timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display, that is, the jackpot expectation of the timer effect is higher than the jackpot expectation of the character effect. It is set.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of the setting suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion effect and executes the front variable display suggestion effect based on the variable display result. The presence / absence and the effect to be executed as the suggestion effect during the variable front display are determined from the character effect and the timer effect (153SGS314). Specifically, FIG. 8-26 (B)
As shown in, when the variable display result is a big hit, the non-execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined at a rate of 30%, and the character effect is used as the suggestion effect during the front variable display at a rate of 0%. The execution is decided, and the execution of the timer effect is decided as a suggestion effect during the front variable display at a rate of 70%. If the variable display result is out of alignment, 80% of the time, 80% of the time, the non-execution of the front variable display suggestion effect is decided, and 0% of the time, the character effect is decided as the front variable display, the suggestion effect. Then, at a rate of 20%, the execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display.

That is, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is decided as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, when the variable display result is a big hit, the front variable display is performed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is out of order. It is set so that the execution of the suggestion effect is determined, and the execution of the character effect is not determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display regardless of whether the variable display result is a big hit or not. That is, the jackpot expectation of the timer effect is set higher than the jackpot expectation of the character effect.

For this reason, when the variable display result is a big hit, the execution of the timer effect is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is out of order as a result. When the timer effect is executed as the effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the variable display result becomes a big hit.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-25, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the suggestion effect during the front variable display is determined after the execution of the 153 SGS 313 or the 153 SGS 314 (153 SGS 315). If it is decided not to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the suggestion effect determination process during the front variable display is terminated, and if it is decided to execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the front part is further determined. It is determined whether or not the execution of the character effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the variable display (153SGS316).

If the execution of the character effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the effect pattern of the character effect is determined and stored based on the variable display result, and the suggestion effect determination process during the front variable display is terminated. (153SGS317).

As a character effect effect pattern that can be determined in the process of 153 SGS317, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (C), a total of two effect patterns, pattern CS-1 and pattern CS-2, are provided. .. Of these effect patterns, pattern CS-1 is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: low) that suggests that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit by displaying the character A (not shown) on the image display device 5 is the lowest. Yes, the pattern CS-2 is an effect pattern (big hit expectation: medium) suggesting that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit by displaying the character B (not shown) on the image display device 5 is higher than that of the pattern CS-1. ).

Therefore, in the processing of 153SGS317, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIGS. 8-27.
As shown in (A), when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect pattern of the character effect is determined to be pattern CS-1 at a rate of 20%, and to pattern CS-2 at a rate of 80%. On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of alignment, the effect pattern of the character effect is set to 8.
The pattern CS-1 is determined at a rate of 0%, and the pattern CS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%.

Further, when the execution of the timer effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the timer effect based on the effect determined to be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. Is determined and stored, and the suggestion effect determination process during the front variable display is terminated (153SGS318).

As a timer effect effect pattern that can be determined in the processing of the 153 SGS 318, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (C), a total of two effect patterns, pattern TS-1 and pattern TS-2, are provided. Among these effect patterns, the pattern TS-1 suggests that the rate at which the variable display result becomes a big hit in the image display device 5 is higher than that of the character effect patterns CS-1 and pattern CS-2 (big hit expectation: high). ) And the effect that suggests the period until the start of execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display for 25 seconds together with the image of the character X. The pattern TS-2 is the ratio at which the variable display result becomes a big hit in the image display device 5. Suggests that is higher than the character-directed patterns CS-1 and CS-2 (
It is an effect that suggests the period until the execution start of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display together with the image of the character Y for 25 seconds together with the jackpot expectation (high) (FIGS. 8-27 (C) and 8-2).
9 (D) and FIG. 8-29 (E)).

Therefore, in the process of 153SGS318, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIGS. 8-27.
As shown in (B), when the suggestion effect during the rear variable display whose execution is determined is the jackpot suggestion effect, the effect pattern of the timer effect is determined to be the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80%.
The pattern TS-2 is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the pattern TS-1 at a rate of 80% and the pattern TS- at a rate of 20% when the suggestion effect during the rear variable display for which execution is determined is a setting suggestion effect. Decide on 2.

That is, when the timer effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2 rather than in the pattern TS-1 (that is, the timer). The effect period of the effect is long, and the character A on the image display device 5
(When character B is displayed), the ratio of setting suggestion effect being executed as suggestion effect during rear variable display is set higher. Therefore, the feature portion 153SG of the present embodiment
In the above, the player can be made to pay attention to the effect period of the timer effect and the character displayed on the image display device 5. Further, when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, the player can be expected to execute the setting suggestion effect more than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As described above, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (D),
When the timer effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the jackpot expectation is set higher than when the character effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, and the front variable display is performed. The setting suggestion effect is executed as the rear variable display middle suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the middle suggestion effect.

As shown in FIGS. 8-20 to 8-28, when the execution of the front variable display suggestion effect during the variable display is determined, the effect control CPU 120 is determined in the variable display effect process (S172). Process data corresponding to the effect pattern of the suggestion effect during the front variable display may be set, and the effect device may be controlled according to the content of the process data according to the process timer in the subsequent variable display effect process (S172). Further, when it is determined to execute the rear variable display suggestion effect during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the rear variable display suggestion effect start waiting timer every time the variable display effect process is executed. Then, based on the value of the timer for waiting for the suggestion effect during the rear variable display to become 0, the process data corresponding to the determined effect pattern of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is set. Then, in the subsequent variable display effect processing (S172), the effect device may be controlled according to the contents of the process data according to the process timer.

As shown in FIGS. 8-28 (A) and 8-28 (B), the jackpot suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect in the feature unit 153SG are during the execution period of the reach effect. A period longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the non-reach fluctuation pattern (see Fig. 8-6).
It is executed for 7 seconds. Therefore, even if the player takes his eyes off the image display device 5 for a moment, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the jackpot suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect.

Next, with respect to the effect mode during the variable display in the feature unit 153SG, FIGS. 8-29 to 8-
This will be described based on 31. First, as shown in FIGS. 8-29 (A) and 8-29 (B), a new start prize is generated during the variable display, and the hold memory display is displayed as a look-ahead notice effect based on the start prize. When the pattern is determined to be the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ, the first
In the hold storage display area 153SG005D and the second hold storage display area 153SG005U, a new hold storage display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 8-29 (C) to 8-29 (E), as a new variable display,
When the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display, which is the aspect of the camera, is started, the timer effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display is started. At this time, when the effect pattern of the timer effect is the pattern TS-1, the image 153SG005X of the character X is displayed on the left side of the image display device 5 and the rear part is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-29 (D). During the variable display, the timer update display for 25 seconds, which is the period until the suggestion effect, is started. When the effect pattern of the timer effect is the pattern TS-2, as shown in FIG. 8-29 (E), the image 153SG005Y of the character Y is displayed on the left side of the image display device 5, and the rear part is variable. The update display of the timer for 30 seconds, which is the period until the suggestion effect during display, is started.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 8-30 (F) to 8-30 (H), when the variable display progresses together with the update display of the timer up to the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, the super reach effect is started. Then, when the timer reaches 0 seconds during the execution of the super reach effect (the timer effect ends), the jackpot suggestion effect or the setting suggestion effect is started as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display.

Specifically, when the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display, if the determined effect pattern is pattern AS-1, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (I). If a message indicating that the jackpot expectation is low, such as "chance!", Is displayed on the image display device 5, and the determined production pattern is pattern AS-2, FIG. 8-3
As shown in 0 (J), a message indicating that the jackpot expectation such as “hot!” Is higher than that of pattern AS-1 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the determined production pattern is pattern AS-3. If this is the case, as shown in FIG. 8-30 (K), a message indicating that the jackpot expectation degree such as “super hot!” Is higher than that of the pattern AS-2 is displayed on the image display device 5.

On the other hand, if it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display,
As shown in FIGS. 8-31 (L) to 8-31 (P), when the effect pattern of the setting suggestion effect is pattern SS-1 to pattern SS-4, different characters are displayed in the image display device 5. Setting value suggestion image 131SG005H, 131SG005I, 131SG0
The display of 05J and 131SG005K suggests the set values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, when the effect pattern of the set value suggestion effect is the pattern SS-5, the set value suggestion image 131SGS005L, which is a collection of all the characters to be displayed on the image display device 5 in the patterns SS-1 to the pattern SS-4, is the image display device. It is displayed at 5.

As described above, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as the look-ahead notice, the look-ahead notice is not executed or the hold memory display is displayed. The setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when is displayed as a white square or a star. For this reason, the player suggests the setting by a mobile terminal such as a smartphone, which is possessed in anticipation that the setting suggestion effect will be executed in advance when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera. You can now be ready to shoot the production. That is, the hold memory display of the blue or red camera mode in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment is also an effect of urging the player to prepare for shooting the setting suggestion effect.

As described above, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute a character effect and a timer effect having a higher expectation of a big hit than the character effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display that suggests the expectation of a big hit. As shown in −26 (D), when the timer effect is executed during the variable display, the setting suggestion effect is set as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed during the variable display. Will be executed. That is, when the timer effect is executed, the player pays more attention to whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit because the jackpot expectation is higher than when the character effect is executed. The setting suggestion effect is executed while the player is paying attention, and the player can prevent the setting suggestion effect from being overlooked.

Further, as the front variable display suggestion effect during variable display, in addition to the character effect, a timer effect that suggests the period until the start of the rear variable display suggestion effect can be executed.
By executing the setting suggestion effect, the player can easily recognize the execution start timing of the setting suggestion effect.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as a timer effect, the period until the start of execution of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is displayed as a numerical value (see FIGS. 8-29 (D) and 8-29 (E)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a timer effect, for example, it is suggested that the rear variable display is performed by displaying an increase / decrease of a gauge, a meter, or the like. It is possible not to clearly notify the period until the start of execution of the effect (suggest only the approximate period).

Further, in the feature portion 153SG of the present embodiment, FIGS. 8-29 (D) and 8-29 (E) are shown.
As shown in the above, a mode in which the timer effect is executed by the image display on the image display device 5 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display on the image display device 5 and the speaker One or a plurality of modes of sound output from 8L and 8R, light emission of the game effect lamp 9, and display by a display means other than the image display device 5 may be combined and executed.

Further, in the feature portion 153SG of the present embodiment, FIGS. 8-30 (H) and 8-31 (L) are shown.
As shown in the above, based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 becomes 0 as the timer effect, the jackpot suggestion effect may be executed in addition to the set suggestion effect as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. is there. That is, even when the timer effect is executed, the jackpot suggestion effect may be executed instead of the setting suggestion effect, so that the unexpectedness can be produced and the game entertainment can be improved.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 becomes 0 as the timer effect, the setting suggestion effect and the jackpot suggestion effect are performed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display. An embodiment in which only one of them can be executed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is based on the fact that the timer displayed on the image display device 5 as a timer effect becomes 0. , Both the setting suggestion performance and the jackpot suggestion production may be executed as the suggestion effect during the rear variable display.

Further, the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment illustrates a mode in which the rear variable display suggestion effect is always executed when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect.
The present invention is not limited to this, and there may be a case where the timer effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display but the suggestion effect during the rear variable display is not executed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-27 (B) and 8-27 (C), as the effect pattern of the timer effect, the pattern TS-1 having an effect period of 25 seconds and the pattern having an effect period of 30 seconds TS-2 is provided, and when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, the setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. That is, it is suggested that when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-2, the setting suggestion effect is executed for a longer period of time than when the timer effect is executed in the pattern TS-1. It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-28, since the rear variable display suggestion effect including the setting suggestion effect is executed during the reach effect period, which is the latter half period in the variable display of the super reach, the player sets suggestion effect. Can be further prevented from being overlooked.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the setting suggestion effect is executed during the reach effect period, which is the latter half period of the variable display of the super reach, is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, there may be a case where the setting suggestion effect is executed in the first half period in the variable display of the super reach.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-18 and 8-22, the display mode of the hold storage display is changed to a white square or star shape, a blue or red camera as a look-ahead notice. In the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display (the value of the hold display flag is 3 or 4), which is the mode of the camera whose display mode is blue or red, it is possible to execute the hold display notice effect that can be displayed by the mode or the like.
It is possible to determine the execution of the setting suggestion effect at a higher rate than the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display (the value of the hold display flag is 1 or 2) whose display mode is a white square or a star. Therefore, the hold storage display (the value of the hold display flag is 3), which is the mode of the camera whose display mode is blue or red.
In the variable display corresponding to 4) and 4), the setting suggestion effect is executed when the player is paying attention to whether or not the variable display result is a big hit, so it is necessary to prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect. Can be done.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-29 and 8-31, the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment corresponds to the hold storage display which is the target of the hold display notice effect when the hold display notice effect is executed. It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect in the variable display (variable display immediately after the hold display notice effect is finished). For this reason, the setting suggestion effect is executed when the player is paying attention to the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display, which is the target of the hold display notice effect, so that the player can miss the setting suggestion effect. It can be further prevented.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the hold display notice effect can be executed as a look-ahead notice is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold display notice is given as a look-ahead notice. It may be possible to execute an effect other than the effect, and suggest that the setting suggestion effect is executed as the effect mode of the effect.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the setting suggestion effect can be executed in the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display which is the target of the hold display notice effect (variable display immediately after the hold display notice effect is finished). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is more than the start of the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display which is the target of the hold display notice effect during the execution period of the hold display notice effect. It may be possible to execute the setting suggestion effect from the previous timing).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-19, the ratio of displaying the hold storage display in the form of a blue or red camera as the look-ahead notice effect is such that the hold memory display is displayed as a white square or a star as the look-ahead notice effect. Since it is set lower than the display ratio, the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, so that the hold memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape. It is possible to draw attention to the person and further prevent the technician from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the ratio of displaying the hold memory display in the form of a blue or red camera as the look-ahead notice effect is the ratio of displaying the hold memory display as the look-ahead notice effect in a white square or star shape. Although the embodiment set to be lower than the display ratio in is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold storage display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a pre-reading notice effect. The ratio may be set higher than the ratio of displaying the hold memory display as a pre-reading notice effect with a white square or a star shape, or the hold memory display may be set as a pre-read notice effect of a blue or red camera. The ratio of displaying in the mode and the ratio of displaying the hold memory display as a white square or a star as a pre-reading notice effect may be the same.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as a hold display notice effect, the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera to prepare the player for shooting the setting suggestion effect. Since the player can prepare a form terminal such as a smartphone before the start of the setting suggestion effect, the success rate of shooting the setting suggestion effect by the player can be increased.

In addition, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as a hold display notice effect, the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera to prepare the player for shooting the setting suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the hold storage display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a hold display notice effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are used. The player may be separately urged to prepare for shooting the setting suggestion effect by the sound output of the above, the display of the message image on the image display device 5, and the like.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, the hold display notice effect is produced by the display pattern γ that displays the hold memory display in the form of a blue camera and the display pattern δ that displays the hold memory display in the form of a red camera. It is feasible, and as shown in FIG. 8-22 (A), when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue camera (when the value of the hold display flag is 3), the hold memory display is red. When displayed in the mode of the camera (when the value of the hold display flag is 4)
The rate at which the setting suggestion effect is executed is different. In particular, when the hold memory display is displayed in the mode of the red camera, the setting suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate than when the hold memory display is displayed in the mode of the blue camera. When the display is displayed in the mode of the red camera, the player pays more attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed than when the hold memory display is displayed in the mode of the blue camera. It is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, the hold memory display is displayed until the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display starts. Although the embodiment in which the embodiment does not change is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this.
A case may be provided in which the display mode of the hold storage display changes from the mode of the blue camera to the mode of the red camera, and the hold storage display corresponding to the variable display during execution is continuously displayed as the active display. However, there may be a case where the display mode of the active display is changed from the mode of the blue camera to the mode of the red camera. By doing so, the player can pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed until the variable display ends.
You can improve your game entertainment.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-20, the suggestion effect during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect is only in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach having a long special figure fluctuation time. It is feasible, and it is not executed in the variable display of the normal reach or non-reach fluctuation pattern with a short special figure fluctuation time, so it is possible to suppress the execution of the setting suggestion effect during the short variable display period, and the game It is possible to prevent the person from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-6 and 8-28, the execution period of the setting suggestion effect is set to 7 seconds, which is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern, so that the super reach is variable. It is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect during the display (during the execution of the reach effect).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-19, when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera, the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display is a super reach capable of executing the setting suggestion effect. Since it is suggested that the display is variable, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed by displaying the hold memory display in the form of a blue or red camera. Can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-19, when the fluctuation category is non-reach or other (normal reach or small hit), that is, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time is shorter than the super reach, the hold display is displayed. Since the hold memory display is not displayed in the form of a blue or red camera as a warning effect, the player was paying attention to the fact that the hold memory display was displayed in the form of a blue or red camera. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion effect from being not executed and the interest from being lowered because the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display is a variable display such as non-reach or normal reach.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-20 to 8-28, during the variable display of the super reach, the suggestion effect during the front variable display including the timer effect can be executed, but it is more special than the variable display of the super reach. Figure The timer effect is not executed during the variable display of non-reach or normal reach with a short fluctuation time, so the timer effect is not executed during the rear variable display including the setting suggestion effect. The timer effect is not executed during the variable display of non-reach or normal reach. It is possible to prevent inconsistency in the production due to the execution of.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-26 (D), when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect, the front variable display suggestion effect is used. The jackpot expectation is set higher than when the character effect is executed, and the suggestion effect is set as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 8-32 as a modified example 153SG-1, execution of a timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display. Is set lower than the ratio for determining the execution of the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, and when the timer effect is executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, the front is variable. It may be set to execute the setting suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the character effect is executed as the display suggestion effect.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as a look-ahead notice, the first reserved storage display area 153SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 153SG005U of the image display device 5 are used.
In the present invention, a mode in which a hold display notice effect for displaying a hold memory display in the form of a white square, a star, a blue or red camera has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is a modification. As shown in FIGS. 8-33 (A) and 8-33 (B) as Example 153SG-2, the first reserved storage display area 153SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 153SG005U
When the predetermined effect image 153SG005E overlaps with the first hold storage display area 153SG005D and the second hold storage display area 153SG005U in the image display device 5 when the hold storage display is displayed, at least the blue or red camera The hold storage display of the mode may be displayed with priority over the effect image 153SG005E (the hold memory display of the blue or red camera mode may be displayed so as not to be hidden by the effect image 153SG005E). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the hold storage display of the blue or red camera mode due to the obstruction of the hold memory display of the blue or red camera mode by the effect image 153SG005E. be able to.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, 7 is performed only during the variable display of the super reach.
Although the embodiment in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed over a second is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and FIGS. 8-34 (A) and 8-34 (B) are shown as modified examples 153SG-3. As shown in the above, the setting suggestion effect may be executed for 7 seconds during the variable display of normal reach or non-reach without shortening. Further, during the variable display of the shortened non-reach, the period dedicated to the variable display of the shortened non-reach (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-34 (C), is the special figure variation time of the variable display of the shortened non-reach. The setting suggestion effect may be executed for 3 seconds (3 seconds shorter than 3.75 seconds to 5.75 seconds).

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-22 (A), the hold storage display is displayed in the mode of the blue camera and the mode of the red camera as the hold display notice effect. Although the embodiment in which the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect is different from that displayed in is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 153SG-4, the mode of the camera in which the hold storage display is blue. The determination ratio of at least one effect pattern in the setting suggestion effect may be different depending on whether it is displayed in the mode of the red camera or in the mode of the red camera. By doing so, the player can pay attention to whether the hold storage display is displayed in the form of the blue camera or the mode of the red camera as the hold display notice effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, there are two timings (2 from the start of the variable display) as the start timing of the suggestion effect during the rear variable display during the variable display of the super reach.
5 seconds later and 30 seconds later) are provided, and it is easier to execute the setting suggestion effect as the rear variable display suggestion effect by executing the rear variable display suggestion effect from a later timing. The present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 153SG-5, when the start timing of the setting suggestion effect is 30 seconds after the start of the variable display, the start timing of the setting suggestion effect is 25 seconds after the start of the variable display. Pattern SS-3 with the setting suggestion effect at a higher rate than when
~ Pattern SS-5 or the like may be executed with an effect pattern suggesting a high set value. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed, so that the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the embodiment, the setting suggestion effect is executed according to the effect executed as the suggestion effect during the front variable display and the display mode of the hold memory display displayed as the hold display notice effect. Although a form suggesting whether or not to be performed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is displayed as an effect executed as a suggestion effect during front variable display and a hold display notice effect. It may be suggested whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed only by one of the display mode of the hold storage display. Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the setting suggestion effect can be executed as the rear variable display suggestion effect during the variable display for executing the timer effect as the front variable display suggestion effect is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result of the variable display that executes the timer effect is a big hit, the setting suggestion effect is set during the big hit game (advantageous state in the present invention) based on the variable display. May be executed.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, when the hold display notice effect is already executed, the embodiment of restricting the execution of the new hold display notice effect is illustrated, but the present invention is limited to this. If the hold display notice effect is already executed, the execution of only a part of the new hold display notice effects may be restricted. For example, if the hold display notice effect is already executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ (when the hold memory display is displayed in the form of a blue or red camera), a new hold display notice effect is displayed. Only what is executed in the display pattern α or the display pattern β (the hold memory display is displayed as a white square or a star) is restricted. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming difficult to understand due to the simultaneous execution of a plurality of hold display notice effects having different suggested contents. Further, when the hold display notice effect is already executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ in this way, a new hold display notice effect is displayed in the display pattern α or the display pattern β.
By limiting the execution in, the player can pay more attention to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. In addition, if the hold display notice effect has already been executed in the display pattern α or the display pattern β (when the hold memory display is displayed in a white square or star shape), a new hold display notice effect is displayed. Whether or not the variable display result is a big hit by limiting only what is executed in the display pattern γ or the display pattern δ (the hold memory display is displayed in the manner of a blue or red camera) The player can be even more noticed.

It should be noted that the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment exemplifies a mode in which a hold display notice effect can be executed as a look-ahead effect in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this.
As the look-ahead effect, an effect other than the hold display notice effect may be executed as long as the effect can be executed from a timing before the variable display of the target starts.

Further, in the feature unit 153SG of the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a character effect and a timer effect can be executed as a suggestion effect during the front variable display suggesting that the variable display result becomes a big hit has been illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and as the suggestion effect during the front variable display, an effect other than the character effect or the timer effect may be executed as long as the effect suggests that the variable display result is a big hit.

As a conventional game machine, it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player, and an effect suggesting which setting value is set (
Some of them are capable of performing setting suggestion effects (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-2010902). However, since it is difficult to understand the opportunity for the setting value to be suggested by the setting effect, the player may overlook the setting suggestion effect. Therefore, the feature unit 153SG is shown below for the purpose of providing a game machine capable of preventing the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect (
The characteristic configurations of the gaming machines shown in means A1) to (means A6) are also disclosed.

(Means A1)
The gaming machine described in means A1
It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. It is a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
The advantageous state suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 shows the variable display shown in FIG. 7) capable of executing the advantageous state suggestion effect (for example, the suggestion effect during the front variable display) suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled. The part that executes the middle production process) and
Setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 12) capable of executing a setting suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during variable display at the rear) that gives a suggestion regarding the setting of a set value.
0 is the part that executes the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 7) and
With
The advantageous state suggestion effect executing means has a higher ratio of controlling the advantageous state suggestion effect to the first aspect (for example, the character effect as the suggestion effect during the front variable display) and the advantageous state than the first aspect. It can be executed in the second aspect (for example, a timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display).
When the advantageous state suggestion effect is executed in the second aspect, the setting suggestion effect executing means has a higher ratio of the setting suggestion effect than when the advantageous state suggestion effect is executed in the first aspect. Can be executed after the execution of the advantageous state suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-26, when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect, the character is used as the front variable display suggestion effect. The part where the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than when the effect is executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the setting suggestion effect is executed when the player is paying attention to the subsequent development because the second aspect in which the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is relatively high is executed as the advantageous state suggestion effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

(Means A2)
The gaming machine of the means A2 is the gaming machine according to the means A1.
A display means capable of displaying (for example, an image display device 5) is provided.
The advantageous state suggestion effect execution means is
As the advantageous state suggestion effect of the second aspect, the period suggestion effect suggests a period until the setting suggestion effect is executed as a specific mode by displaying the period information on the display means and then updating and displaying the period information. (For example, a timer effect) can be executed.
According to this feature, the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect can be easily recognized by the player by executing the period suggestion effect.

(Means A3)
The gaming machine of means A3 is the gaming machine described in means A2.
The setting suggestion effect executing means can execute at least one of the special suggestion effect suggesting that the period information is controlled to the advantageous state based on the specific mode and the setting suggestion effect. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-30 and 8-31, the part where the jackpot suggestion effect or the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the timer becoming 0).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, not only the setting suggestion effect but also the special suggestion effect may be executed due to the execution of the period suggestion effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved by producing the unexpectedness.

(Means A4)
The gaming machine of the means A4 is the gaming machine according to the means A2 or the means A3.
The advantageous state suggestion effect execution means is
A first period (eg, 25 seconds) or a second period (eg, a period longer than the first period).
It is possible to execute the above-mentioned period suggestion effect for 30 seconds).
When the update display of the numerical information is executed over the second period, the setting suggestion effect executing means has a higher ratio than when the update display of the numerical information is executed over the first period. The setting suggestion effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-27, when the timer effect is executed for 30 seconds, it is higher than when the timer effect is executed for 25 seconds. The part where the setting suggestion effect is executed at a rate)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, when the period suggestion effect is executed over the second period, the setting suggestion is given to the player for a longer period than when the period suggestion effect is executed over the first period. Since it is suggested that the effect is executed, it is possible to further prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

(Means A5)
The gaming machine of the means A5 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means A1 to the means A4.
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol variation process shown in FIG. 5 or a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display in-process effect process shown in FIG. 7. ),
The setting suggestion effect executing means can execute the setting suggestion effect according to the fact that the execution period of the variable display becomes a specific period corresponding to a specific timing in the latter half period of the variable display (for example, FIG. 8-FIG. As shown in 28, the effect control CPU 120 is at a timing (25 seconds or 30 seconds after the start of the variable display) at which the timer effect ends during the execution period of the reach effect during the variable display of the super reach. The part where the setting suggestion effect can be executed according to the situation)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the setting suggestion effect is executed in the latter half period of the variable display, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

(Means A6)
The game machine of means A6
It is possible to control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1)
The advantageous state suggestion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 shows the variable display shown in FIG. 7) capable of executing the advantageous state suggestion effect (for example, the suggestion effect during the front variable display) suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled. The part that executes the middle production process) and
Setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 12) capable of executing a setting suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect as a suggestion effect during variable display at the rear) that gives a suggestion regarding the setting of a set value.
0 is the part that executes the variable display effect processing shown in FIG. 7) and
With
The advantageous state suggestion effect executing means can execute the advantageous state suggestion effect in the first aspect and the second aspect in which the execution rate is lower than that of the first aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-32). The part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute the suggestion effect during the front variable display from the character effect and the timer effect whose execution rate is lower than that of the character effect).
When the advantageous state suggestion effect is executed in the second aspect, the setting suggestion effect executing means has a higher ratio of the setting suggestion effect than when the advantageous state suggestion effect is executed in the first aspect. Can be executed after the execution of the advantageous state suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-26, when the timer effect is executed as the front variable display suggestion effect, the character is used as the front variable display suggestion effect. The part where the setting suggestion effect can be executed at a higher rate than when the effect is executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the advantageous state suggestion effect is executed in the second aspect, the setting suggestion effect is executed when the player is paying attention to the advantageous state suggestion effect of the second aspect. It is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

(Embodiment 1 of the game machine according to the feature unit 028SH)
(Explanation of feature section 028SH)
Next, the first embodiment of the gaming machine according to the feature unit 028SH will be described. Feature 028
The game machine related to SH is a game machine that can perform variable display of identification information and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described as an example of the gaming machine according to the feature unit 028SH.

First, the outline of the feature unit 028SH will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 028SH can execute a reach effect. Reach production is, for example, multiple (for example, 3)
Of the decorative symbols of (1), some (for example, 2) decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the same or related symbols, and the remaining part (for example, 1) of the decorative symbols continue to be variablely displayed. Is.

The reach effect includes a normal reach in which a non-reach loss variation display (hereinafter, may be referred to as “normal variation”) is executed, and a super reach executed after the normal reach. Super reach is a reach production with higher expectations for big hits than normal reach. Furthermore, the super reach includes a super reach (hereinafter referred to as "weak super reach") in which the jackpot expectation is a predetermined expectation, and a super reach (hereinafter referred to as "strong super reach") in which the jackpot expectation is higher than the weak super reach. ).

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 028SH can execute a pseudo continuous effect. The pseudo-continuous effect is an effect that makes one variable display look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. Specifically, the pseudo-continuous effect is, for example, an effect in which all of a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and then varied and displayed (revariated) again. In the temporary stop display of the decorative pattern in the pseudo-continuous production,
A specific decorative symbol (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo-continuous symbol") indicating that a pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed is stopped and displayed.

Here, the pseudo-continuous production will be specifically described. For example, in the case of an effect of displaying two variable displays (pseudo-ream effect of two pseudo-reams), the number of times the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed is one. In this case, the fluctuation display before the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped is called the first fluctuation display of the pseudo-ream, and the fluctuation display after the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped is called the second fluctuation display of the pseudo-ream. Further, in the case of the pseudo-ream effect of three times of the pseudo-ream, the number of times the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed is two times.
It should be noted that the pseudo-ream effect of one pseudo-ream is not a pseudo-ream effect but a normal variation because the pseudo-ream symbol is not temporarily stopped and displayed. However, in the following description, the normal variation may be described as a pseudo-ream effect of one pseudo-ream.

Further, the pseudo-continuous production includes a pseudo-continuous production with a low jackpot expectation (hereinafter referred to as "weak pseudo-continuous production") and a pseudo-continuous production with a high jackpot expectation (hereinafter referred to as "strong pseudo-continuous production"). In the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol in the weak pseudo-ream effect, a specific decorative symbol (hereinafter referred to as "weak pseudo-ream symbol") indicating that the weak pseudo-ream effect is performed is stopped and displayed. Similarly, in the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol in the strong pseudo-continuous effect, a specific decorative symbol (hereinafter referred to as "strong pseudo-continuous symbol") indicating that the strong pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed is stopped and displayed.

The pseudo-continuous production is executed, for example, before the start of the weak super reach or after the start of the weak super reach. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 028SH, the pseudo continuous effect is executed before the start of the normal reach or after the start of the weak super reach.

Here, the degree of expectation of a big hit in each production will be described. For example, the temporary stop display of a strong pseudo-ream pattern is an effect with a high expectation of a big hit. Specifically, if the strong pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped before the start of normal reach, there is a high possibility that it will develop into strong super reach. Also,
If the strong pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped after the start of the normal reach, it is more likely to develop into a strong super reach than when the strong pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped before the start of the normal reach. For this reason, the variable display in which the strong pseudo-ream symbol temporarily stops after the start of normal reach is
This is a variable display with the highest expectation of a big hit.

On the other hand, for example, the temporary stop display of the weak pseudo-continuous pattern is an effect in which the expectation of a big hit is not so high. Specifically, even if the weak pseudo-ream symbol temporarily stops before the start of normal reach, it is unlikely that it will develop into strong super reach. More specifically, even if the weak pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped before the start of normal reach, there is a high possibility that the display result of loss will be derived and displayed in normal reach, and it will develop into normal reach depending on the allocation of fluctuation patterns. In some cases, the display result of the loss may be derived and displayed. For this reason, the temporary stop display of the weak pseudo-ream pattern is not a promising effect for the player.

Further, even if the weak pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed after the start of the weak super reach and then develops into the strong super reach, the loss display result is likely to be derived and displayed. For this reason, from the player's point of view, despite the fact that the weak super reach was executed and developed into a promising production, the weak pseudo-reach pattern was temporarily stopped and displayed after the start of the weak super reach, resulting in a big hit. You can't expect it.

As a result, the player may desire to move to the next variable display as soon as possible in the variable display after the weak pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, that is, the player may feel that the effect is simply delayed. There is. In this way, there was room for improvement in order to enhance the interest in the configuration using a plurality of types of pseudo-continuous symbols that trigger re-variation.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 028SH, when the pseudo-ream effect is performed after the start of the weak super reach, the weak pseudo-ream symbol is not temporarily stopped, that is, only the strong pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped. It will be displayed. The functional configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 028SH will be described below.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 028SH includes a variable display executing means, an effect executing means, and
To be equipped. The variation display executing means is realized by the CPU 103 of the main board 11 and the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12. The effect execution means is realized by, for example, the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12.

The variable display executing means can execute variable display of the identification information. The identification information is, for example, a special symbol or decorative identification information (decorative symbol). The variable display executing means starts the variable display of the identification information when the start condition is satisfied, and stops the variable display of the identification information when a predetermined fluctuation time elapses.

There are multiple types of variable display execution patterns. For example, the execution pattern of the variation display includes a re-variation pattern in which the identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed again (re-variation). Specifically, the re-variation pattern is a variation pattern of a pseudo-continuous production.

When the variation display executing means executes the re-variation pattern, the first special identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the second special identification information, which is highly expected to be controlled in a more advantageous state than the first special identification information. There are times when the temporary stop is displayed. The first special identification information is, for example, a weak pseudo-continuous symbol. The second special identification information is, for example, a strong pseudo-continuous symbol.

The first special identification information may be temporarily stopped before the start of the predetermined reach effect, and may not be temporarily stopped after the start of the predetermined reach effect. On the other hand, the second special identification information may be temporarily stopped and displayed before the start of the predetermined reach effect, or may be temporarily stopped after the start of the predetermined reach effect.

More specifically, the weak pseudo-continuous symbol may be temporarily stopped before the start of the weak super reach, and may not be temporarily stopped after the start of the weak super reach. In the feature unit 028SH, the period before the start of the weak super reach in which the weak pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped is, for example, before the start of the normal reach. However, before the start of the weak super reach in which the weak pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, it may be after the start of the normal reach, and specifically, it may be the end timing of the normal reach. In addition, the strong pseudo-continuous symbol has a case where a temporary stop is displayed before the start of the weak super reach and a case where the temporary stop is displayed after the start of the weak super reach.

Further, in the feature unit 028SH, at least a first reach effect and a second reach effect are included as the effect executed after the identification information is in the reach state. The first reach effect is, for example, a normal reach. Further, the second reach effect is a reach effect that is executed after the first reach effect and is controlled to be more advantageous than the first reach effect.
The second reach effect is, for example, a weak super reach.

Further, in the feature unit 028SH, as an effect executed after the identification information is in the reach state, the third reach, which is executed after the second reach effect and is controlled to be more advantageous than the second reach effect, has a high degree of expectation. Directing is included. The third reach production is, for example, a strong super reach.

Further, in the feature unit 028SH, when the first special identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed before the start of the second reach effect, the ratio of the identification information stopped and displayed without executing the second reach effect after the variable display is performed again. This is higher than the rate at which the identification information is stopped and displayed by executing the third reach effect. Specifically, when the weak pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed before the start of normal reach, the ratio of the identification information stopped and displayed without executing the weak super reach after the variable display is performed again is the stronger super reach. It is higher than the rate at which the identification information is stopped and displayed when executed.

Further, in the feature unit 028SH, when the second special identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed before the start of the second reach effect, the rate at which the identification information is stopped and displayed by executing the third reach effect after the variable display is performed again. However, it is higher than the rate at which the identification information is stopped and displayed without executing the second reach effect. Specifically, when the strong pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed before the start of the normal reach as before the start of the weak super reach, the rate at which the strong super reach is executed and the identification information is stopped and displayed after the variable display is performed again. Is higher than the rate at which the identification information is stopped and displayed without executing weak super reach.

Further, in the feature unit 028SH, the second special identification information is controlled to be in an advantageous state when the temporary stop is displayed after the start of the second reach effect than when the temporary stop is displayed before the start of the second reach effect. Expectations are high. Specifically, the strong pseudo-ream symbol has a higher expectation of a big hit when the temporary stop is displayed after the start of the weak super reach than when the temporary stop is displayed before the start of the normal reach as the weak super reach. ..

Further, in the feature unit 028SH, the effect executing means can execute the effect. The effect executing means can execute the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect. The first suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the first special identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed. Specifically, the first suggestion production is
This is an effect that suggests that the weak pseudo-ream pattern is temporarily stopped (hereinafter, also referred to as "weak fanning effect"). The second suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the second special identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed. Specifically, the second suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the strong pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (
Hereinafter, it is also referred to as "strong fanning production").

In the feature unit 028SH, the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect can be executed before the start of the predetermined reach effect. Specifically, before the start of the normal reach as before the start of the weak super reach, the weak fanning effect and the strong fanning effect can be executed. On the other hand, feature part 028
In SH, after the start of the predetermined reach effect, it is possible to execute the strong fanning effect without executing the weak fanning effect. Specifically, before the start of the normal reach as before the start of the weak super reach, it is possible to execute the strong fan without executing the weak fan effect.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest even if a configuration using a plurality of types of pseudo-continuous symbols that trigger re-variation.

In addition, in this specification, "high ratio" or "different ratio" means A: B = 70.
A: B = 100%, regardless of whether the ratio of one is high or different, such as%: 30%.
: 0%, one with a higher percentage or a different one (ie, one allocation is 10)
It is a concept that includes 0% and the other allocation is 0%).

(About the transition of a series of productions including pseudo-continuous productions)
Next, the transition of a series of effects including the pseudo-continuous effect will be described with reference to FIG. 9-1. Figure 9
-1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a series of transitions of the effect in the feature unit 028SH. In addition, it should be noted
In FIG. 9-1, a pseudo-ream effect of two pseudo-reams will be described as an example.

In FIG. 9-1, the fluctuation display patterns (execution patterns) shown in (A) to (D) are normal fluctuation (non-reach loss), normal reach (described as “N reach” in the figure), and weak. Super reach (described as "weak SP reach" in the figure) and strong super reach (described as "strong S" in the figure)
Described as "P reach") and. In addition, in FIG. 9-1, (B) and (C) excluding (A)
, (D), when comparing the jackpot expectations of the execution patterns shown in (D), in descending order
It is (C) and (B).

FIG. 9-1 (A) shows an execution pattern when the pseudo-continuous effect is not performed. In particular,
(A) shows an execution pattern in which "normal fluctuation"->"normalreach"->"weak super reach"->"strong super reach" in the execution order of each fluctuation. The timing at which the display result of the identification information can be derived and displayed is the timing before it develops into each effect. Specifically, at the end of normal fluctuation (at the end of non-reach loss), at the end of normal reach, or , At the end of weak super reach or at the end of strong super reach.

FIG. 9-1 (B) shows an execution pattern when the weak pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed before the normal reach. Specifically, in (B), in the execution order of each fluctuation, the execution pattern is "pseudo-ream 1st time"->"pseudo-ream second time"->"normalreach"->"weak super reach"->"strong super reach". Shown. The fluctuation display of the first pseudo-ream is a fluctuation display similar to the normal fluctuation, but is a fluctuation display in which a combination of decorative symbols showing a loss is not derived and displayed unlike the normal fluctuation. Further, at the end of the second pseudo-ream, the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed, which is a variable display. However, at the end of the second pseudo-ream, the display result of the identification information (for example, the display result of loss) may be derived and displayed.

As shown in (B), in the first variation display of the pseudo-ream, the weak pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. Before the weak pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, a weak fanning effect suggesting that the weak pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped is executed. In addition, when the weak pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the weak fanning effect may not be executed. As a result, even if the weak fanning effect is not executed,
Since the weak pseudo-ream pattern may be temporarily stopped and displayed to the player, the effect can be noticed.

Further, as shown in (B), in the second variation display of the pseudo-ream, the background image becomes the weak pseudo-ream background for notifying the weak pseudo-ream effect. When the second variation display of the pseudo-ream is completed, the normal reach is executed. Here, if the weak pseudo-continuous production is executed, there is a high possibility that it will end with normal reach. That is, although it is shown by a dotted line in FIG. 9-1 (B), in most cases, when the weak pseudo-continuous production is executed, it does not develop into a weak super reach or a strong super reach.

FIG. 9-1 (C) shows an execution pattern when the strong pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed before the normal reach. Specifically, (C) shows the same execution pattern as (B). As shown in (C), in the first variation display of the pseudo-ream, the strong pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. Before the strong pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, a strong fanning effect suggesting that the strong pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped is executed. In addition, when the strong pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the strong fanning effect may not be executed. As a result, it is possible to expect the player to temporarily stop and display the strong pseudo-continuous symbol even when the strong fanning effect is not executed.

Further, as shown in (C), in the second variation display of the pseudo-ream, the background image becomes the strong pseudo-ream background for notifying the strong pseudo-ream effect. When the second variation display of the pseudo-ream is completed, the normal reach is executed. When a strong pseudo-continuous production is executed, there is a high possibility that it will develop into a strong super reach.

FIG. 9-1 (D) shows an execution pattern when the strong pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed after the start of the weak super reach. Specifically, in (D), in the order of execution of each fluctuation, "pseudo-ream first time" →
"Normal reach"->"Weak super reach"->"Pseudo-ream second time"->"Strong super reach"
The execution pattern is shown. In addition, at the timing when the second pseudo-ream production ends,
The display result of the identification information is not derived and displayed.

In (D), the variation display of the first pseudo-ream is a normal variation in which the pseudo-ream symbol does not temporarily stop the display, but corresponds to the variation display of the first pseudo-ream. However, in the execution pattern shown in (D), the pseudo-ream symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed in the first variation display of the pseudo-ream.

After the first variation display of the pseudo-ream, normal reach is executed, and then weak super reach is executed. Then, in the weak super reach, the strong pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. Before the strong pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped, a strong fanning effect suggesting that the strong pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped is executed. In addition, when the strong pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the strong fanning effect may not be executed. As a result, it is possible to expect the player to temporarily stop and display the strong pseudo-ream pattern even when the strong fanning effect is not executed.

Here, the strong fanning effect during the weak super reach shown in (D) and the strong fanning effect before the start of the normal reach shown in (C) may be the same production mode or different production modes. Good. By making the strong fanning effect during the weak super reach and the strong fanning effect before the start of the normal reach the same production mode, the strong fanning effect can be made a simple and clear effect. Further, in the feature unit 028SH, the temporary stop display of the strong pseudo-continuous symbol after the start of the weak super reach has a higher expectation of big hit than the temporary stop display of the strong pseudo-continuous symbol before the start of the normal reach. By setting the strong fanning effect shown in (D) and the strong fanning effect shown in (C) in different production modes, it is possible to perform a strong fanning effect according to the degree of expectation of a big hit.

Further, as shown in (D), in the second variation display of the pseudo-ream, the background image becomes the strong pseudo-ream background for notifying the strong pseudo-ream effect. In the feature unit 028SH, the variation display of the second pseudo-ream shown in (D) is a variation display corresponding to the second pseudo-ream. When the second variation display of the pseudo-ream is completed, the strong super reach is executed. At the end of the second pseudo-ream, the display result of the identification information is not derived and displayed.

(About the fluctuation pattern determination table related to the feature unit 028SH)
Next, the fluctuation pattern determination table related to the feature unit 028SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-2 and 9-3. FIG. 9-2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table for loss. FIG. 9-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table for big hits.

Each fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 9-2 and 9-3 has a “variation pattern” and
Includes "production content", "variable time", "MR3", and "decision ratio". The "variation pattern" indicates a character or a number for identifying each variation pattern (each execution pattern). The "directed content" includes a "pseudo-number of times" and a "variable content of the decorative pattern". "Pseudo-number of times" indicates the number of pseudo-reams. "Variation content of decorative pattern" indicates a variation mode of the decorative pattern. The "variable time" indicates the execution time of the special figure game. “MR3” indicates a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern, and indicates any number in the range 1 to 997. “Determining ratio” indicates the ratio at which each fluctuation pattern is determined. The "decision ratio" is included in the fluctuation pattern determination table for convenience of explanation, but may not be included in the fluctuation pattern determination table.

In the following description, the variation pattern determination table for loss of FIG. 9-3 will be mainly described, and the variation pattern determination table for big hits of FIG. 9-4 will be described in comparison with the variation pattern determination table for loss. ..

In the loss pattern determination table shown in FIG. 9-3, the non-reach loss variation pattern can be determined. The fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss is the fluctuation pattern "PA10-1".
, "PA10-2" and "PA10-3". The fluctuation pattern "PA10-1" is
The fluctuation time is 12 seconds, and it is determined when the number of holds is "1" or "2". The fluctuation pattern "PA10-2" is determined when the fluctuation time is 7 seconds and the number of holds is "3".
The fluctuation pattern "PA10-3" is determined when the fluctuation time is 4 seconds and the number of holds is "4". MR3 determination values "1" to "740" are assigned to the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss is 74%.

The fluctuation patterns "PA10-1", "PA10-2" and "PA10-3" are
The decision rate is the same (74%) regardless of the number of holds, but the decision rate may differ depending on the number of holds. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern "PA10-3", the fluctuation pattern "PA1"
The determination rate may be higher than that of "0-2", and in the case of the variation pattern "PA10-2", the determination rate may be higher than that of the variation pattern "PA10-1". As a result, when the number of holds is large, the game can be played more quickly than when the number of holds is small.

Next, the fluctuation pattern that develops into reach production will be described. Fluctuation pattern "PA20
-1 ”is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation content of the normal reach is performed without the pseudo-continuous production. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA20-1" is 18 seconds. Of the fluctuation time of 18 seconds, for example, the normal fluctuation is performed in the first 12 seconds, and the fluctuation display of the normal reach is performed in the remaining 6 seconds. The fluctuation pattern "PA20-1" includes the judgment values "741" of 50 MR3s.
"790" is assigned. Therefore, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern “PA20-1” is 5%.

The variation pattern "PA20-2" is a variation pattern that does not involve a pseudo-continuous effect, and is a variation pattern in which the variation content of the weak super reach is performed after the normal reach. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA20-2" is 50 seconds. Of the 50 second fluctuation time, for example
The normal fluctuation is performed in the first 12 seconds, the fluctuation content of the normal reach is performed in the next 6 seconds, and the weak super reach is performed in the last 32 seconds. The fluctuation pattern "PA20-2" is assigned 40 MR3 determination values "791" to "830". Therefore, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern “PA20-2” is 4%.

The variation pattern "PA20-3" is a variation pattern that does not involve a pseudo-continuous effect, and is a variation pattern in which the variation content of the strong super reach is performed after the normal reach. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA20-3" is 68 seconds. Of the 68-second fluctuation time, for example
The normal fluctuation is performed in the first 12 seconds, the fluctuation content of the normal reach is performed in the next 6 seconds, and the strong super reach is performed in the last 50 seconds. The fluctuation pattern "PA20-3" is assigned 30 MR3 determination values "831" to "860". Therefore, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern “PA20-3” is 3%.

The variation pattern “PA20-4” corresponds to the execution pattern shown in FIG. 9-1 (A). Specifically, the fluctuation pattern "PA20-4" is a fluctuation pattern that does not involve a pseudo-continuous effect, and is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation content of the strong super reach is performed after the normal reach and the weak super reach. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA20-4" is 100 seconds. Of the fluctuation time of 100 seconds, for example, the normal fluctuation is performed in the first 12 seconds, the fluctuation content of the normal reach is performed in the next 6 seconds, the weak super reach is performed in the next 32 seconds, and the last. Strong super reach is performed in 50 seconds. The fluctuation pattern "PA20-4" has 2
The determination values "861" to "885" of the five MR3s are assigned. Therefore, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern “PA20-4” is 2.5%.

The variation pattern "PA20-5" is a variation pattern in which the variation content of the normal reach is performed after performing the pseudo-continuous production twice. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA20-5" is
It is 30 seconds. Of the 30-second fluctuation time, for example, the first 12 seconds of the pseudo-ream display the first fluctuation display, the next 12 seconds the second pseudo-ream display, and the remaining 6 seconds the normal reach fluctuation. The display is done. The fluctuation pattern "PA20-5" is assigned 45 MR3 determination values "886" to "930". Therefore, the fluctuation pattern "PA20-5"
The decision rate is 4.5%.

The variation pattern "PA20-6" is a variation pattern in which the variation content of the weak super reach is performed after the normal reach after performing the pseudo-continuous production twice. Fluctuation pattern "PA
The fluctuation time of "20-6" is 62 seconds. Of the 62 second fluctuation time, for example, the first 12
The first fluctuation display of the pseudo-ream is performed in seconds, and the second fluctuation display of the pseudo-ream is performed in the next 12 seconds.
Furthermore, the fluctuation display of the normal reach is performed in the next 6 seconds, and the weak super reach is performed in the last 32 seconds. In the fluctuation pattern "PA20-6", the judgment values "931" of 35 MR3s ~
"965" is assigned. Therefore, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern "PA20-6" is 3.5%.

The variation pattern "PA20-7" is a variation pattern in which the variation content of the strong super reach is performed after the normal reach after performing the pseudo-continuous production twice. Fluctuation pattern "PA
The fluctuation time of "20-7" is 80 seconds. For example, the first 12 of the 80-second fluctuation time
The first fluctuation display of the pseudo-ream is performed in seconds, and the second fluctuation display of the pseudo-ream is performed in the next 12 seconds.
Furthermore, the fluctuation display of the normal reach is performed in the next 6 seconds, and the strong super reach is performed in the last 50 seconds. In the fluctuation pattern "PA20-7", the judgment values "966" of 20 MR3s ~
"985" is assigned. Therefore, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern “PA20-7” is 2.0%.

The variation pattern “PA20-8” corresponds to the execution pattern shown in FIGS. 9-1 (B) to (D). Specifically, in the fluctuation pattern "PA20-8", one of the following two fluctuation contents (effect pattern) is performed. The first variation is two pseudo-continuous productions (24).
Seconds), normal reach (6 seconds), and weak super reach (32 seconds), after
It is a fluctuation content in which a strong super reach (50 seconds) is performed. In the following, this variation content may be referred to as "pseudo-twice normal production".

The second variation is the normal reach (6 seconds) after the first pseudo-ream (12 seconds).
And weak super reach (32 seconds), and further, the second pseudo-reach (12 seconds) is performed, and strong super reach (50 seconds) is performed. In the following, this fluctuation content is described as "
It may be called "pseudo-twice special production". One of the two variation contents (effect pattern) of the pseudo-twice normal effect and the pseudo-two-time special effect is determined by using the effect pattern determination table described later with reference to FIGS. 9-5.

The fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern "PA20-8" is 112 seconds. Regardless of which of the pseudo-two-time normal effect and the pseudo-two-time special effect is performed, the variation is executed at a variation time of 112 seconds. In the fluctuation pattern "PA20-8", the judgment values "986" to "9" of 12 MR3s
97 "is assigned. Therefore, the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern "PA20-8" is
It is 1.2%.

Next, the jackpot variation pattern determination table of FIG. 9-3 will be described. FIG. 9 described above
The acronym of "variation pattern" shown in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss of -2 is "PA", but the acronym of "variation pattern" shown in the fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot is "PB".
Is different. However, in each table, the numbers of "fluctuation pattern", "effect content" and "variation time" other than the acronym of "variation pattern" are the same, and each corresponding fluctuation pattern is
The same fluctuation content and fluctuation time.

As shown in FIG. 9-3, "PB20-8", "PB20-7", and "P" are in order from the plurality of fluctuation patterns "PB20-1" to "PB20-8" that are easily selected.
"B20-4", "PB20-3", "PB20-6", "PB20-2", "PB20-"
The order is "5" and "PB20-1". On the other hand, among the fluctuation patterns "PA20-1" to "PA20-8" that perform the reach effect shown in the fluctuation pattern determination table for loss in FIG. 9-2, the order of the fluctuation patterns that are easily selected is shown in FIG. 9-3. The order of fluctuation patterns that are easily selected "PB20-1" to "PB20-8" is the reverse order.

As a result, the production contents corresponding to "PA20-8" and "PB20-8" are most easily executed at the time of a big hit and most difficult to be executed at the time of a loss, so that the fluctuation contents with the highest expectation of a big hit are obtained. ing. On the other hand, the production corresponding to "PA20-1" and "PB20-1" is the most difficult to be executed at the time of a big hit and is most likely to be executed at the time of a loss, so that the fluctuation content with the lowest expectation of a big hit There is.

In addition, when the jackpot expectation of each production content is described in detail, in descending order of jackpot expectation, "P
B (PA) 20-8 "," PB (PA) 20-7 "," PB (PA) 20-4 "," PB
(PA) 20-3 "," PB (PA) 20-6 "," PB (PA) 20-2 "," PB (
The order is "PA) 20-5" and "PB (PA) 20-1".

The allocation (ratio) of the determination value of MR3 shown in the variation pattern determination table for loss and the variation pattern determination table for jackpot is only an example. For example, the ratio of the pseudo-continuous production performed twice in the pseudo-ream may be lower than the above-mentioned value. Further, the types of fluctuation patterns are only an example, and dozens or hundreds of types may be stored.

Further, in the above description, the number of pseudo-reams has been described by taking two times (two pseudo-reams) as an example, but it may be three or more times. When the number of pseudo-reams is 3 or more, the number of pseudo-reams before the start of weak superreach (before the start of normal reach in the feature unit 028SH) and the number of pseudo-reams after the start of weak superreach are arbitrarily set. You can leave it. For example, the number of pseudo stations is 3
In the case of times, the fluctuation pattern may be such that the pseudo-ream is performed twice before the start of the weak super reach and the pseudo-ream is once after the start of the weak super reach, or the pseudo-ream is performed once before the start of the weak super reach. , It may be a fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-ream is performed twice after the start of weak super reach. It should be noted that, even for the fluctuation pattern in which the number of pseudo-reams is 3 or more, the jackpot expectation according to the fluctuation content is obtained for each fluctuation pattern in the same manner as the fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo-ream effect is performed twice in the pseudo-ream. , MR3 determination value may be assigned.

Further, regarding the fluctuation patterns "PA20-8" and "PB20-8", a plurality of production patterns corresponding to one fluctuation pattern (a production pattern of a pseudo-two-time normal production and a production pattern of a pseudo-two-time special production). Is stored in the effect control board 12 (RAM 122), and one of the effect patterns is determined, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the fluctuation pattern "PA20-8",
As for "PB20-8", as in the case of other fluctuation patterns, one fluctuation pattern and one effect pattern may correspond to each other.

Further, for the other fluctuation patterns other than the fluctuation patterns "PA20-8" and "PB20-8", one effect pattern is associated with one fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one fluctuation pattern is used. Correspondingly, a plurality of effect patterns may be stored in the effect control board 12 (RAM 122). In this way, a plurality of effect patterns are stored in the effect control board 12 (RAM 122) corresponding to one variation pattern, and the effect pattern is determined by the effect control CPU 120, whereby the game control microcomputer 100 CPU 10
It is possible to reduce the processing load of 3 and the amount of data stored in the RAM 102. Especially,
It is more effective when the number of fluctuation patterns is large.

(An example of the effect determination process related to the pseudo continuous effect performed by the effect control CPU 120)
Next, an example of the process included in the effect determination process shown in step S171 of FIG. 7 will be described with reference to FIG. 9-4. FIG. 9-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect determination process related to the pseudo continuous effect by the effect control CPU 120.

In FIG. 9-4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command included in the effect control command is one of the variation patterns "PA20-8" and "PB20-8". Is determined (step 028SHS101).
The fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is the fluctuation pattern "PA20-8.
”And“ PB20-8 ”(step 028SHS101: NO
), The effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 028SHS106.

On the other hand, the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is the fluctuation pattern "PA".
When it is either "20-8" or "PB20-8" (step 028SHS101)
: YES), the effect control CPU 120 executes the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination process with reference to the pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table described later with reference to FIG. 9-5 (step 028SHS).
102). In the pseudo-continuous production pattern determination process, the pseudo-continuous production is performed twice before the normal reach (pseudo-twice normal production), or the pseudo-continuous production is performed before the normal reach and after the start of the weak super reach. It is decided whether or not it is the production pattern (pseudo 2 times special production).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the determined effect pattern is a pseudo-twice special effect effect pattern (an effect pattern that executes a pseudo-continuous effect after a weak super reach) (step 028SHS103). When the determined effect pattern is a pseudo-twice special effect effect pattern (step 028SHS103: YES), the effect control CPU 1
20 determines a strong pseudo-continuous symbol as a temporary stop symbol after the start of weak super reach (step 028SHS104).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the execution of the strong fan effect during the weak super reach (
Step 028SHS105) and step 028SHS109. Further, in step 028SHS103, when the determined effect pattern is not the effect pattern of the pseudo-twice special effect (step 028SHS103: NO), that is, when the determined effect pattern is the effect pattern of the pseudo-twice normal effect, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 028SHS107.

In step 028SHS106, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the pattern is a variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is performed (step 028SHS106). If it is not a variable pattern that performs a pseudo continuous effect (step 028SHS106: NO), the effect control CPU
120 shifts to step 028SHS110.

In the case of a variable pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is performed (step 028SHS106: YES),
The effect control CPU 120 refers to the temporary stop symbol determination table described later with reference to FIG. 9-6, and refers to the temporary stop symbol (either the weak pseudo-continuous symbol or the strong pseudo-continuous symbol) in the first variation display of the pseudo-ream. ) Is executed (step 028SHS107). Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes and sets the fanning effect in the first variation display of the pseudo-ream (step 028SHS108). Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the pseudo continuous effect to be executed (step 028SHS109), and ends a series of processes.

In step 028SHS110, in the effect control CPU 120, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command included in the effect control command is the variation pattern “P.
Determine whether or not it is "A10-1" (non-reach loss without shortening) (step 028S)
HS110). When the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command included in the effect control command is not the variation pattern "PA10-1" (non-reach loss without shortening) (step 028SHS110: NO), the effect control CPU 120 performs a series of processes. To finish.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command included in the effect control command is the variation pattern "PA10-1" (non-reach loss without shortening) (step 028SHS110: YES), the effect control CPU 120 is simulated. The continuous symbol is made to appear as if it is temporarily stopped, and a process for determining whether or not to perform a temporary stop effect is executed (step 028SHS111). In the Gase effect determination process, a Gase effect determination table (not shown) is referred to, and it is determined that the Gase effect is executed at a rate of, for example, 1/20.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the effect of the temporary stop display as a result of the process of determining the effect of the effect (step 028SHS112). When the temporary stop display is not executed (step 028SHS112: NO), the effect control CPU 120 ends a series of processes. When executing the temporary stop display Gase effect (step 028SHS11)
2: YES), the effect control CPU 120 sets the temporary stop display to be executed (step 028SHS113), and ends a series of processes.

(Example of production pattern determination table for pseudo-continuous production)
Next, using FIG. 9-5, a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination process (step 028S in FIG. 9-4).
An example of the table used in HS102) will be described. FIG. 9-5 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect pattern determination table for pseudo-continuous production. The effect pattern determination table for the pseudo-continuous effect is used when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is any of the variation patterns "PA20-8" and "PB20-8".

As shown in FIG. 9-5, the effect pattern determination table for the pseudo-continuous effect is a “variation pattern”.
, "Direction pattern", "Variation content of decorative pattern", and "Decision ratio" are included. The “variation pattern” indicates either “PA20-8 (loss)” or “PB20-8 (big hit)”. The "directing pattern" indicates four types of "GS-1" to "GS-4". The "variation content of the decorative pattern" indicates the transition of the specific variation content of each of the pseudo-twice normal effect and the pseudo-two-time special effect. The "decision ratio" indicates the ratio at which each effect pattern is determined for each fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 9-5, in the case of the fluctuation pattern "PA20-8 (loss)", the effect pattern "GS-1 (pseudo 2 times normal effect)" is determined at a rate of 70%, and the effect pattern "GS-" is determined.
2 (pseudo 2 times special production) ”is determined at a rate of 30%. On the other hand, the fluctuation pattern "PB2"
In the case of "0-8 (big hit)", the production pattern "GS-3 (pseudo 2 times normal production)" is determined at a rate of 30%, and the production pattern "GS-4 (pseudo 2 times special production)" is 70%. It is determined by the ratio of.

As described above, the effect pattern "GS-1 (pseudo 2 times normal effect)" is easily determined at the time of loss, and the effect pattern "GS-3 (pseudo 2 times normal effect)" is difficult to determine at the time of a big hit. On the other hand, it is easy to determine the effect pattern "GS-4 (pseudo 2 times special effect)" at the time of a big hit, and it is difficult to determine the effect pattern "GS-2 (pseudo 2 times special effect)" at the time of loss. For this reason, the pseudo-twice special effect is an effect with a higher expectation of a big hit than the pseudo-two-time normal effect.

(Example of temporary stop symbol determination table)
Next, an example of the table used in the process of determining the temporary stop symbol (step 028SHS107 in FIG. 9-4) in the first variation display of the pseudo-ream will be described with reference to FIG. 9-6. FIG. 9-6 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a temporary stop symbol determination table during the pseudo first variation. The effect pattern determination table for the pseudo-continuous effect is used when the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is performed twice in the pseudo-continuous effect. However, the fluctuation patterns "PA20-8" and "PB20-8" are excluded.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, the temporary stop symbol determination table includes a "variation pattern", a "variation content of the decorative symbol", and a "temporary stop symbol determination ratio". The "fluctuation pattern" is "PA20".
-5 (Loss) "-" PA20-8 (Loss "," PB20-5 (Big hit) "-" PB2
Indicates one of 0-8 (big hit). "Variation content of decorative pattern" indicates the transition of the specific variation content of the pseudo-ream effect of two pseudo-reams. "Decision ratio" is for each fluctuation pattern. Shows the ratio at which one of "strong pseudo-continuous symbol" and "weak pseudo-continuous symbol" is determined.

As shown in FIG. 9-6, the fluctuation pattern of normal reach "PA20-5 (loss)",
In the case of "PB20-5 (big hit)", the fluctuation pattern of weak super reach "PA20-6 (loss)", and "PB20-6 (big hit)", the weak pseudo-continuous symbol is determined rather than the strong pseudo-continuous symbol. The percentage is higher. That is, it can be suggested that when the weak pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped in the temporary stop display of the first pseudo-ream symbol, it is difficult to develop into a strong super reach.

On the other hand, fluctuation patterns "PA20-7 (loss)" and "P" that develop into strong super reach
In the case of "A20-8 (loss)", "PB20-7 (big hit)", and "PB20-8 (big hit)", the ratio of strong pseudo-continuous symbols determined is higher than that of weak pseudo-continuous symbols. That is, it can be suggested that when the strong pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped in the temporary stop display of the pseudo-ream first pseudo-ream symbol, it is likely to develop into a strong super reach.

In the temporary stop display of the pseudo-ream symbol for the first time of the pseudo-ream, when the strong pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped, it may always develop into a strong super reach. Specifically, in the case of fluctuation patterns "PA20-7 (loss)", "PA20-8 (loss)", "PB20-7 (big hit)", and "PB20-8 (big hit)" that develop into strong super reach. , The ratio at which the strong pseudo-continuous symbol is determined may be 100%.

Further, in FIG. 9-6, in the case of a big hit, the strong pseudo-continuous pattern is more likely to be determined than in the case of a loss, regardless of the fluctuation pattern. For example, when comparing the normal reach fluctuation pattern "PA20-5 (loss)" and "PB20-5 (big hit)", "
"PB20-5 (big hit)" is easier to determine the strong pseudo-continuous pattern than "PA20-5 (loss)". For this reason, in the temporary stop display of the pseudo-ream symbol for the first time of the pseudo-ream, when the strong pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when the weak pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped. It can be a production.

(Example of screen transition of variable display with pseudo-continuous production)
Next, an example of a screen transition of a variable display accompanied by a pseudo-continuous effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-7 to 9-9. FIG. 9-7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a screen transition of the pseudo-twice normal effect in which the weak pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. Note that FIG. 9-7 describes the screen transition of the pseudo-twice normal effect (effect pattern GS-1 of FIG. 9-5) when the display result of the loss is derived and displayed.

FIG. 9-7 (A) shows a screen at the start of the first variation display of the pseudo-ream. As shown in (A), the image display device 5 displays a variable display (scroll) of the decorative symbol 028SH100. The decorative symbol 028SH100 includes three symbols, a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol. Further, the image display device 5 displays an active display 028SH110. Although not shown in FIG. 9-7, when there is a hold memory, the active display 02
A hold display is displayed next to the 8SH110.

Further, the screen shown in (A) is displayed by determining and executing various effects based on the effect control command received from the main board 1 by the effect control CPU 120. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variation display of the decorative symbol 028SH100 (fixed decorative symbol), and the decorative symbol 0.
28SH100's variable display mode, reach effect, various notice effects, and other effects are determined, and the mode and execution start timing are determined. Based on the decision result, the decorative design 02
8 The variation display of SH100 is executed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode according to the game state based on the game state specified by the effect control command, and executes the effect mode based on the determination result. In (A), when a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds) elapses, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (B).

FIG. 9-7 (B) shows a screen of a weak fanning effect. As shown in (B), decorative pattern 028
The SH100 has a symbol of "2" and is in a reach mode. Further, (B) shows a weak fanning effect suggesting that the weak pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH120 may temporarily stop and display at the position of the middle symbol. In the weak fanning effect, the weak pseudo-continuous pattern 028SH120 appears to rise from a state in which it appears to be transparent (unclear state) to a state in which it appears to rise to the front (for example).
It is displayed by changing to a clear state) or repeating a clear state and an unclear state. Further, in the weak fanning effect, a predetermined lamp is turned on, a predetermined background image is displayed, a predetermined sound effect is output, and the like, which indicates that the fanning effect is weak.

Further, the mode of the weak fanning effect is not limited to the mode in which the unclear state and the clear state can be changed. For example, the weak fanning effect may be a mode in which the weak pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH120 moves the image from the top to the bottom and stops in the middle. Further, the mode of the decorative symbol 028SH100 when performing the weak fanning effect (when displaying the weak pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily) is not limited to the reach mode. For example, the left symbol and the right symbol may be offset by one frame, or a specific symbol may be stopped (temporarily stopped) on the right symbol. Further, when performing the weak fanning effect, the decorative symbol 028SH100 may be displayed as a small symbol, the display area may be enlarged (using the entire display screen), and the weak fanning effect may be performed.

When it is time to temporarily stop and display the weak pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH120, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (C). In addition, in the feature unit 028SH, a weak fanning effect is performed, and the strong pseudo-continuous symbol is not temporarily stopped and displayed. However, from the viewpoint that the production will not be reduced.
A weak fanning effect may be performed, and a strong pseudo-ream pattern may be temporarily stopped and displayed.

FIG. 9-7 (C) shows a screen when the weak pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH120 is temporarily stopped and displayed. Specifically, (C) shows a screen in which the weak pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH120 in the weak fanning effect changes from an unclear state to a clear state, and the temporary stop display of the weak pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH120 is confirmed. Further, in (C), it is emphasized that the blue weak effect image 028SH121 is displayed, and the temporary stop display of the weak pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH120 is confirmed. The temporary stop display of the weak pseudo-ream symbol 028SH120 indicates that the weak pseudo-ream effect is performed.

The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 9-8, but the weak pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH120
Instead, when the strong pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the movable body 32 provided around the image display device 5 emits light in a predetermined color and operates in front of the image display device 5, and the strong pseudo-ream is displayed. It is becoming more emphasized that the temporary stop display of the symbol has been confirmed.

Further, the timing at which the weak pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH120 temporarily stops and displays is 1 from the start of fluctuation.
2 seconds. Here, at the timing when 12 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, a display result indicating a loss may be derived and displayed. Specifically, in the case of a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern without shortening (fluctuation pattern “PA10-1”), a display result indicating the loss is derived and displayed at the timing when 12 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation.

Further, even in the case of a non-reach loss fluctuation pattern without shortening (fluctuation pattern “PA10-1”), a weak fanning effect may be performed. However, in this case, the display result indicating the loss is derived and displayed at the timing of deriving and displaying the display result. That is, in this case, since the weak pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH120 does not temporarily stop and display, the weak fanning effect becomes a ghost effect.

FIG. 9-7 (D) shows a screen of a weak pseudo-ream effect for the second time of the pseudo-ream. In the second variation display of the pseudo-ream, the variation display (scroll) of the decorative symbol 028SH100 is restarted. Further, in the second variation display of the pseudo-ream, a background image indicating that the pseudo-ream effect is performed is displayed.
For example, the background image showing that it is a weak pseudo-continuous production is a background image showing a scene of moonlit night.
This background image is continuously displayed until the decorative symbol 028SH100 is in the reach mode again. At the timing when the reach mode is reached when the second pseudo-ream ends (30 from the start of fluctuation)
After a second has passed), the screen transitions to the screen shown in (E).

FIG. 9-7 (E) shows a normal reach screen. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a notification image 028SH130 indicating “reach!”, Notifying that the normal reach has been achieved. In addition, since this fluctuation display is not a fluctuation display with a high expectation of big hits because a weak pseudo-continuous production is performed, the display result showing a loss in the normal reach is derived and displayed without developing into a weak super reach. There is a good chance. For this reason, the player does not expect a big hit at the stage of normal reach.

Further, after that, when the end timing of the normal reach comes, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (F). The end timing of the normal reach is 30 seconds from the start of the fluctuation. here,
At the timing when 30 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, a display result indicating a loss or a big hit may be derived and displayed. Specifically, in the case of a fluctuation pattern that ends with normal reach (fluctuation pattern "PA20-5", "PB20-5"), a display result indicating a loss or a big hit is displayed at the timing when 30 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation. Derived and displayed.

FIG. 9-7 (F) shows a screen of weak super reach. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays a character image 028SH140 indicating weak superreach and a target image 028SH141 indicating a notice. The character image 028SH140 is
This is an image in which the character shoots a bow and arrow. Further, the target image 028SH141 is an image showing a plurality of notices. The plurality of notices indicated by the target image 028SH141 include, for example, a "hit" indicating a big hit, a "development" indicating the development of a strong super reach, and a "sorry" indicating a loss. Of the multiple notices, if the character shoots a bow and arrow and shoots through one of the roulette wheels, it suggests that the notice indicated by the shot part will be given. For example, if the "development" of the notice indicated by the target image 028SH141 is shot by the character, the process shifts to (G).

The timing at which the weak super reach ends is 62 seconds from the start of the fluctuation. Here, at the timing when the weak super reach ends, a display result indicating a loss or a big hit may be derived and displayed. Specifically, in the case of a fluctuation pattern ending with a weak super reach (fluctuation pattern "PA20-6", "PB20-6"), a display indicating a loss or a big hit is displayed when 62 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation. The result is derived and displayed.

In addition, since this fluctuation display is not a fluctuation display with a high expectation of big hits because a weak pseudo-continuous production was performed, the display result showing a loss in the weak super reach is derived and displayed without developing into a strong super reach. There is a good chance that it will be done. For this reason, the player cannot expect so much to develop from a weak super reach to a strong super reach. When the display result indicating the loss is derived and displayed in the weak super reach, the character shoots out the “loss” in the notice indicated by the target image 028SH141, and then the display result indicating the loss is derived and displayed. In addition, when the display result indicating a big hit is derived and displayed in the weak super reach, the character indicates "in the notice indicated by the target image 028SH141".
"Hit" is shot through, and then the display result indicating the big hit is derived and displayed.

FIG. 9-7 (G) shows a screen of strong super reach. In the strong super reach, a battle production is performed. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays the character shown in the character image 028SH 150 and the enemy character shown in the character image 028SH 151. Further, in (G), the decorative symbol 028SH100 is not displayed on the image display device 5, and the small symbol 028SH101 is variablely displayed (scrolled). At the end timing of the strong super reach, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (H).

FIG. 9-7 (H) shows a loss notification screen. Specifically, the image display device 5 indicates that the battle has been defeated. Further, in the small symbol 028SH101, the display result indicating the loss is derived and displayed. The time until the end of the strong super reach is 112 seconds from the start of the fluctuation.

In this way, the effect of weak fanning → temporary stop display of weak pseudo-ream pattern → weak pseudo-ream effect → normal reach → weak super reach → strong super reach is performed.

FIG. 9-8 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a screen transition of the pseudo-twice normal effect in which the strong pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. Note that FIG. 9-8 describes the screen transition of the pseudo-twice normal effect (effect pattern GS-3 in FIG. 9-5) when the display result of the jackpot is derived and displayed. In addition, FIG.
In −8, the same contents as those in FIG. 9-7 will be omitted as appropriate.

FIG. 9-8 (A) is the same screen as FIG. 9-7 (A), and shows the screen at the start of the first variation display of the pseudo-ream. In this variable display, the display result of the big hit is derived and displayed.
When a notice effect with a high expectation of a big hit (for example, character notice, step-up notice, cut-in notice, notice due to change in background image, etc.) is performed at a predetermined timing in normal fluctuation or at a timing after (B). There is also. In (A), when a predetermined time (for example, 7 seconds) elapses, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (B).

FIG. 9-8 (B) shows a screen of a strong fanning effect. As shown in (B), decorative pattern 028
The SH100 has a symbol of "7" and is in a reach mode. For example, the reach mode of the symbol "7" is a reach mode in which the expectation of a big hit is higher than the reach mode of the other symbols. Also,(
B) shows a strong fanning effect suggesting that the strong pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH220 may temporarily stop and display at the position of the middle symbol. The strong pseudo-ream symbol 028SH220 is a weak pseudo-ream symbol 028.
It is a display mode different from SH120, and for example, a character is displayed.

In the strong fanning effect, for example, the strong pseudo-continuous pattern 028SH220 changes from a state in which it appears to be transparent (unclear state) to a state in which it appears to rise to the front (clear state), or is clear. It is displayed by repeating the unclear state and the unclear state. Also,
In the strong fanning effect, a predetermined lamp is turned on, a predetermined background image is displayed, and a predetermined sound effect is output, which indicates that the fanning effect is performed.

In addition, the strong fanning effect is not limited to a mode in which an unclear state and a clear state can be changed. For example, the strong fanning effect may be a mode in which the strong pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH 220 moves the image from the upper side to the lower side and stops in the middle. Further, the mode of the decorative symbol 028SH100 at the time of performing the strong fanning effect (when displaying the strong pseudo-continuous symbol temporarily) is not limited to the reach mode. For example, the left symbol and the right symbol may be offset by one frame, or a specific symbol may be stopped (temporarily stopped) on the right symbol. Further, when performing the strong fanning effect, the decorative symbol 028SH100 may be displayed as a small symbol, the display area may be enlarged (using the entire display screen), and the strong fanning effect may be performed.

When the timing for the temporary stop display of the strong pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH220 comes, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (C). In addition, from the viewpoint that the production will be reduced, a strong production is performed,
The weak pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH120 is not displayed as a temporary stop.

FIG. 9-8 (C) shows a screen when the strong pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH220 is temporarily stopped and displayed. Specifically, (C) shows a screen in which the strong pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH220 in the strong fanning effect takes a clear state from an unclear state, and the temporary stop display of the strong pseudo-continuous symbol 022SH220 is confirmed. Further, in (C), the red strong effect image 028SH221 is displayed, and it is emphasized that the temporary stop display of the strong pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH220 is confirmed. The color (red) of the strong effect image 028SH221 is different from the color (blue) of the weak effect image 028SH121.

Further, in (C), the movable body 32 provided around the image display device 5 emits light in a predetermined color (for example, red) and operates on the front surface of the image display device 5, and the strong pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH 220 is temporarily stopped. It is more emphasized that the display has been confirmed. The movable body 32 does not operate when the weak pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH 120 temporarily stops and displays (see (C) in FIG. 9-7). For this reason, the effect when the strong pseudo-ream symbol 028SH220 temporarily stops is displayed as the weak pseudo-ream symbol 028SH12.
It can be more lively than the effect when 0 is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the strong pseudo-ream pattern 028SH2
It is possible to improve the effect of the effect when 20 temporarily stops and displays.

The temporary stop display of the strong pseudo-ream symbol 028SH220 indicates that the strong pseudo-ream effect is performed.
After that, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (D).

In the case of the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern without shortening (variation pattern “PA10-1”), the display result indicating the loss is derived and displayed at the timing of the temporary stop display of the strong pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH220 in (C). In the case of this non-reach loss variation pattern without shortening,
In some cases, a strong fanning effect is performed. However, in this case, the display result indicating the loss is derived and displayed at the timing of deriving and displaying the display result. That is, in this case, the strong pseudo-continuous symbol 02
Since the 8SH220 does not display a temporary stop, the strong fanning effect is a ghost effect.

FIG. 9-8 (D) shows the screen of the second strong pseudo-ream effect of the pseudo-ream. In the second variation display of the pseudo-ream, the variation display (scroll) of the decorative symbol 028SH100 is restarted. Further, in the second variation display of the pseudo-ream, a background image indicating that the pseudo-ream effect is performed is displayed.
For example, the background image showing that it is a strong pseudo-continuous production is a background image showing a scene of fireworks.
This background image is continuously displayed until the decorative symbol 028SH100 is in the reach mode again. At the timing when the reach mode is reached when the second pseudo-ream ends (30 from the start of fluctuation)
After a second has passed), the screen transitions to the screen shown in (E).

FIG. 9-8 (E) shows a normal reach screen similar to FIG. 9-7 (E). In addition, it should be noted
Since this variable display is a variable display with a higher expectation of big hits than when a weak pseudo-continuous effect is performed because a strong pseudo-continuous effect is performed, the player can change from a normal reach to a weak super reach. I hope that it will develop into.

FIG. 9-8 (F) shows a weak super reach screen similar to FIG. 9-7 (F). In addition, since this variable display is a variable display with a higher expectation of a big hit than when a weak pseudo-continuous effect is performed because a strong pseudo-continuous effect is performed, the player can start from a weak super reach. I hope that it will develop into a strong super reach.

FIG. 9-8 (G) shows a screen of strong super reach similar to FIG. 9-7 (G). Since this variation display is a variation display with a high expectation of a big hit, the player expects that the display result of the big hit is derived and displayed (winning the battle).

FIG. 9-8 (H) shows a jackpot notification screen. Specifically, the image display device 5 displays that the battle has been won. In addition, the small symbol 028SH101 is derived and displayed as a display result indicating a big hit.

In this way, the effect of strong fanning → temporary stop display of strong pseudo-ream pattern → strong pseudo-ream effect → normal reach → weak super reach → strong super reach is performed.

FIG. 9-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a screen transition of the pseudo-twice special effect in which the strong pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. Note that FIG. 9-9 describes the screen transition of the pseudo-twice special effect (effect pattern GS-4 in FIG. 9-5) when the display result of the big hit is derived and displayed.

FIG. 9-9 (A) is the same screen as FIG. 9-8 (A), and shows the screen at the start of the first variation display of the pseudo-ream. In (A), when a predetermined time (for example, 12 seconds) elapses, (B)
) Is displayed.

FIG. 9-9 (B) shows a normal reach screen. It should be noted that, among the reach effects, the effect pattern ending with the normal reach is most likely to be executed, so that the player cannot expect a big hit at the stage of the normal reach in (B). However, since the reach mode of the symbol "7" is a reach mode in which the expectation of a big hit is higher than that of the other symbols, the jackpot is higher than that of the reach mode of the other symbols in the normal reach. You can expect it. Further, in this variable display, since the display result of the big hit is derived and displayed, a notice effect with a high expectation of the big hit may be performed at a predetermined timing in (A) and (B). In this case, a big hit can be expected as compared with the case where the advance notice effect is not performed.

After that, when it is time to end the normal reach, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (C). The timing at which the normal reach ends is 18 seconds from the start of the fluctuation. here,
At the timing when the normal reach ends, a display result indicating a loss or a big hit may be derived and displayed. Specifically, in the case of a fluctuation pattern ending in normal reach (fluctuation pattern "PA20-1", "PB20-1"), a display result indicating a loss or a big hit is displayed at the timing when 18 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation. Derived and displayed.

FIG. 9-9 (C) shows a screen of weak super reach. In the plurality of notices shown by the target image 028SH141, the weak super reach (Fig. 9-7) performed after the pseudo-ream production of two pseudo-reams.
(F) and (F) in FIG. 9-8), a "re" indicating that a pseudo-continuous effect (re-variation) is performed is included. In the target image 028SH141 in weak superreach, "re" may always be displayed. Further, in the target image 028SH 141, "re" may be displayed at a predetermined ratio by the effect determination process according to the predetermined ratio. When displaying at a predetermined ratio, for example, when "re" is displayed and "re"
The probability that the pseudo-continuous production is performed may be different depending on whether is not displayed. For example, the probability that the pseudo continuous effect is performed may be higher when "re" is displayed than when "re" is not displayed.

FIG. 9-9 (D) shows a screen of a strong fanning effect during a weak super reach. As shown in (D), during the weak super reach, a strong fanning effect suggesting that the strong pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH220 may be temporarily stopped and displayed at the position of the middle symbol is shown. The strong fanning effect shown in (D) is compared with the strong fanning effect (see (B) in FIG. 9-8) executed before the start of the normal reach, and the effect during the weak super reach (character image 028SH140 or target image). 028SH141 is displayed), but other than that, it is the same.

In (D), when the character indicated by the character image 028SH140 shoots "re" out of the notice indicated by the target image 028SH141, the strong pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH22
It will be foretold that 0 will be displayed as a temporary stop after that. And strong pseudo series pattern 028S
When it is time to temporarily stop the H220, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (E).

FIG. 9-9 (E) shows a screen when the strong pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH220 is temporarily stopped and displayed, similarly to FIG. 9-8 (C). Specifically, for example, in (E), the movable body 32 provided around the image display device 5 emits light in a predetermined color (for example, red) and operates in front of the image display device 5, and is a strong pseudo-ream. It is emphasized that the temporary stop display of the symbol 028SH220 has been confirmed. The timing at which the weak super reach shown in (E) ends is 50 seconds from the start of fluctuation. Here, at the timing when the weak super reach ends, a display result indicating a loss or a big hit may be derived and displayed. Specifically, in the case of a fluctuation pattern ending with a weak super reach (fluctuation pattern "PA20-2", "PB20-2"), a display indicating a loss or a big hit is displayed when 50 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation. The result is derived and displayed.

When the display result indicating the loss is derived and displayed in the weak super reach, the character shoots out the "loss" in the notice indicated by the target image 028SH141, and then the display result indicating the loss is derived and displayed. To. In addition, when the display result indicating a big hit is derived and displayed in the weak super reach, the target image 028SH1 is determined by the character.
Of the notices indicated by 41, the "hit" is shot through, and then the display result indicating the big hit is derived and displayed.

In addition, fluctuation patterns ending with weak super reach (fluctuation patterns "PA20-2", "
Even in the case of PB20-2 "), a strong fanning effect may be performed. However, in this case, at the timing when 50 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, the display result indicating the loss or the big hit will be derived and displayed, and the strong pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH220 will not be temporarily stopped, so that the strong fanning effect is not good. It will be a production.

If the pseudo-continuous production is executed after the start of the weak super reach, it is confirmed that the strong super reach will be developed. That is, at the end timing of the weak super reach shown in (E),
By displaying the temporary stop display of the strong pseudo-ream symbol 028SH220, the strong pseudo-ream effect is performed after the weak super reach. Therefore, the player can expect a big hit at the stage when the strong pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH220 of (E) temporarily stops and displays. After that, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (F).

FIG. 9-9 (F) shows a screen of the second strong pseudo-ream effect of the pseudo-ream, as in the case of (D) of FIG. 9-8. Also in FIG. 9-9 (F), a background image showing that the strong pseudo continuous effect is displayed is displayed. This background image is continuously displayed until the decorative symbol 028SH100 is in the reach mode again.

When it is time to end the second pseudo-ream (62 seconds after the start of fluctuation), (
The screen transitions to the screen shown in G). The timing at which the second pseudo-ream ends (6 from the start of fluctuation)
At the timing when 2 seconds have passed), the display result is not derived and displayed, and the reach mode (strong super reach) is always set.

FIG. 9-9 (G) shows a screen of strong super reach similar to FIG. 9-8 (G). In addition, after the weak super reach, a pseudo-continuous production (strong pseudo-continuous production) is performed, and the strong super reach that is executed after that has the highest expectation of a big hit, so at the stage when it developed into the strong super reach of (G). , The player is the most uplifting.

FIG. 9-9 (H) shows a jackpot notification screen similar to FIG. 9-8 (H).

As described above, in the feature unit 028SH, the strong pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH 220 may be temporarily stopped before and after the start of the weak super reach (FIGS. 9-8 and 9-9).
). On the other hand, the weak pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH120 may be temporarily stopped before the start of the weak superreach, but may not be temporarily stopped after the start of the weak superreach (FIG. 9-7). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest when performing a pseudo-continuous production after the start of weak super reach.

(Modification 1 of the first embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH)
Next, a modification 1 of the first embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH will be described. In the first embodiment according to the feature unit 028SH described above, the strong fanning effect executed after the start of the weak super reach and before the start of the weak super reach (before the start of the normal reach in the first embodiment related to the feature unit 028SH). We explained the composition of the same production as the performance of the strong fanning that is executed. In the first modification of the first embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH, in place of or in addition to such a configuration, a strong fanning effect executed after the start of the weak super reach and a weak super reach The strong fanning effect performed before the start of is may be different from the effect.

Specifically, for example, the strong fanning effect after the start of the weak super reach and the strong fanning effect before the start of the weak super reach have different background colors, or the strong pseudo-continuous pattern is clear from an unclear state. The change mode when changing to a state may be changed to a different mode. The strong pseudo-continuous production (pseudo 2 times special production) performed after the start of the weak super reach has a higher expectation of a big hit than the strong pseudo-continuous production (pseudo 2 times normal production) performed before the weak super reach. It is a high production. For this reason, by making the strong fanning effect performed after the start of the weak super reach different from the strong fanning effect executed before the start of the weak super reach, the strong fanning effect is performed in a manner corresponding to the jackpot expectation. You can perform the production. Therefore, it is possible to further raise the expectation of the player in the strong fanning effect performed after the start of the weak super reach.

(Modification 2 of the first embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH)
Next, a modification 2 of the eleventh embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH will be described. In the above-described embodiment of the feature unit 028SH, a strong pseudo-continuous symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed after the start of the weak super reach and before the start of the weak super reach (before the start of the normal reach in the first embodiment of the feature unit 028SH). ) Shall be configured in the same display mode as the strong pseudo-continuous symbol displayed temporarily. In the second modification of the first embodiment according to the feature unit 028SH, in place of or in addition to such a configuration, a strong pseudo-continuous symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed after the start of the weak super reach is used. The strong pseudo-continuous symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed before the start of the weak super reach may be displayed differently.

Specifically, for example, the strong pseudo-continuous symbol 02 that is temporarily stopped and displayed after the start of the weak super reach.
8SH220 and strong pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH that is temporarily stopped before the start of weak super reach
The size of the symbol may be different from that of 220, or the character attached to the symbol may be different. As a result, the strong pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH 220 can be temporarily stopped and displayed in a display mode according to the expected degree of jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the expectation of the player in the temporary stop display of the strong pseudo-continuous symbol that is temporarily stopped after the start of the weak super reach.

(Modification 3 of the first embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH)
Next, a modification 3 of the first embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH will be described. In the first embodiment according to the feature unit 028SH described above, the background image of the strong pseudo-continuous effect performed after the start of the weak super reach and the background image of the strong pseudo-continuous effect performed before the start of the weak super reach are obtained.
The configuration having the same display mode has been described. In the third modification of the first embodiment according to the feature unit 028SH, in place of or in addition to such a configuration, a background image of a strong pseudo-continuous effect performed after the start of the weak super reach is used. The background image of the strong pseudo-continuous production performed before the start of the weak super reach may be displayed differently.

Specifically, for example, the size of the image showing the fireworks in the background image of the strong pseudo-continuous production performed after the start of the weak super reach and the background image of the strong pseudo-continuous production performed before the start of the weak super reach. May be different images, or the number of fireworks may be different. This will
It can be used as a background image for a strong pseudo-continuous production in a display mode according to the degree of expectation of a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to further raise the expectation of the player in the strong pseudo-continuous production performed after the start of the weak super reach.

(Modification 4 of the first embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH)
Next, a modification 4 of the first embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH will be described. In the first embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH described above, the configuration in which the weak super reach is one type has been described. In the modified example 4 of the first embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH, a plurality of types of weak super reach may be provided in place of or in addition to such a configuration.

For example, it is sufficient to prepare a plurality of weak super reach with different jackpot expectations. Specifically, a first weak super reach and a second weak super reach, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the first weak super reach, may be prepared. Further, in the case of the second weak super reach, the pseudo continuous effect (temporary stop display of the strong pseudo continuous symbol) may be performed more easily than in the case of the first weak super reach. Further, in the case of the first weak super reach, the strong pseudo-continuous symbol may not be temporarily stopped and displayed, and the strong fanning effect of Gase may be performed more easily than in the case of the second weak super reach.

This makes it possible to perform weak super reach with different jackpot expectations. Therefore, since the production can be developed step by step until the weak super reach is reached, the interest in the weak super reach can be improved.

(Modification 5 of the first embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH)
Next, a modification 5 of the first embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH will be described. In the first embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH described above, the configuration in which the strong super reach is one type has been described. In the modified example 5 of the first embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH, a plurality of types of strong super reach may be provided in place of or in addition to such a configuration.

For example, it is sufficient to prepare a plurality of strong super reach with different jackpot expectations. Specifically, the first strong super reach and the second strong super reach, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the first strong super reach, may be prepared. Further, in the case of the second strong super reach, the display result of the big hit may be more easily derived and displayed than in the case of the first strong super reach. Specifically, the strong pseudo-ream effect (temporary stop display and strong fanning effect of the strong pseudo-reach pattern) is performed after the start of the weak super reach, rather than when the strong pseudo-ream effect is temporarily stopped before the start of the weak super reach. It should be easier to develop into the second strong super reach when it is done.

As a result, it is possible to execute a strong super reach with different jackpot expectations. Therefore, the production can be developed step by step until the strong super reach is reached, and the interest can be improved.

(Modified Example 6 of the first embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH)
Next, a modification 6 of the first embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH will be described. In the first embodiment according to the above-mentioned feature unit 028SH, the pseudo-continuous symbol (strong pseudo-continuous symbol or weak pseudo-continuous symbol) is temporarily stopped and displayed before the start of the normal reach before the start of the weak super reach. explained. In the modified example 6 of the first embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH, instead of such a configuration, or in addition to such a configuration, as a timing for temporarily stopping and displaying the pseudo-continuous symbol before the start of the weak super reach. , May be after the start of normal reach.

Specifically, at the timing when the normal reach ends, the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed.
After that, a pseudo-continuous effect (re-variation) may be performed according to the pseudo-continuous symbol displayed as a temporary stop.
In addition, after the pseudo-continuous production is completed, the weak super reach may be executed. With such a configuration, there are times when it develops from normal reach to weak super reach as it is, and times when it develops from normal reach to super reach through pseudo-continuous production, so the variation of development mode from normal reach is increased. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the modified example 6 of the first embodiment according to the feature unit 028SH, a plurality of timings before the start of the normal reach and after the start of the normal reach can be taken as the timing for temporarily stopping and displaying the pseudo-continuous symbol before the start of the weak super reach. You may do so. In this case, the temporary stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol after the start of the normal reach may be more promising than the temporary stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol before the start of the normal reach.

Specifically, it is easier to temporarily stop and display the strong pseudo-ream symbol when the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed after the start of normal reach than when the pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed before the start of normal reach. Just do it. Further, it is sufficient to make it easier to temporarily stop and display the weak pseudo-continuous symbol when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed before the start of the normal reach than when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed after the start of the normal reach.

As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the timing for temporarily stopping and displaying the pseudo-continuous symbol before the start of the weak super reach, and it is possible to produce a different expectation depending on the timing for temporarily stopping and displaying the pseudo-continuous symbol. it can. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in displaying the pseudo-ream symbol as a temporary stop before the start of the weak super reach.

(Modification 7 of the first embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH)
Next, a modification 7 of the first embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH will be described. In the first embodiment according to the feature unit 028SH described above, a configuration for determining either a pseudo two-time special effect or a pseudo two-time normal effect regardless of the set value as shown in the feature unit 153SG will be described. did. In the modified example 7 of the first embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH, either instead of such a configuration or, in addition to such a configuration, a pseudo two-time special effect or a pseudo two-time normal effect. May be determined according to the set value.

First, the set value is supplemented. The set value is one value that is set among a plurality of values having different advantages for the player. Specifically, the set value is a value for changing the jackpot winning probability according to the set value. For example, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit is changed. The set value is
For example, it consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6. The set value "6" is the value with the highest winning probability, and is "5".
, "4", "3", "2", "1", the smaller the value, the lower the winning probability. That is, when the set value "6" is set, it is most advantageous for the player, and "
The smaller the value in the order of "5", "4", "3", "2", and "1", the lower the advantage for the player.

In the modified example 7, a configuration will be described in which the determination ratio shown in the effect pattern determination table (FIG. 9-5) of the pseudo-continuous production is changed according to the set value. For example, in the case of a high setting (for example, a set value of 5 or more), it is difficult to determine the effect pattern "GS-1 (pseudo-twice normal effect)" when there is a loss, and the effect pattern "GS-3" when there is a big hit. (Pseudo 2 times normal production) ”is easy to determine. On the other hand, it is difficult to determine the production pattern "GS-4 (pseudo 2 times special production)" at the time of a big hit, and it is easy to determine the production pattern "GS-2 (pseudo 2 times special production)" at the time of loss. .. As a result, in the case of a high setting, it is possible to easily produce a rare case at the time of a big hit. In this way, by determining either the pseudo-twice special effect or the pseudo-two-time normal effect according to the set value, the set value can be suggested by the content of the pseudo-continuous effect to be executed. it can. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The configuration shown by the feature unit 028SH can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by the feature unit 153SG to form a game machine. As an example, the feature unit 028SH is
The setting suggestion effect shown by the feature unit 153SG may be performed. More specifically, the feature unit 028SH uses the "advantageous state suggestion effect (for example, the front variable display suggestion effect) as the first aspect (for example, the front variable display suggestion effect) shown in the feature unit 153SG. Character production)
In the second aspect (for example, a timer effect as a suggestion effect during the front variable display), which is more likely to be controlled in an advantageous state than in the first aspect, the advantageous state suggestion effect is performed in the second aspect. When it is executed, the setting suggestion effect may be executed after the execution of the advantageous state suggestion effect at a higher rate than when the advantageous state suggestion effect is executed in the first aspect. " With such a configuration, the feature unit 028SH also executes the setting suggestion effect when the player is paying attention to the subsequent development because the second aspect is executed. It is possible to prevent overlooking the setting suggestion effect.

(Embodiment 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 028SH)
Next, a second embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 028SH will be described. In the first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 028SH described above, the configuration in which the weak pseudo-continuous symbol is not temporarily stopped and displayed after the start of the weak super reach has been described. In the second embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 028SH, a configuration capable of temporarily stopping and displaying the weak pseudo-continuous symbol after the start of the weak super reach will be described. In the following description, the points described in the above-described embodiment of the feature unit 028SH are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

(About the transition of a series of productions including pseudo-continuous productions)
FIG. 9-10 describes the transition of a series of effects including the pseudo continuous effect. Figure 9-10 shows
It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition of a series of productions in a feature part 028SH (the second embodiment which concerns on the feature part 028SH). The execution pattern shown in FIG. 9-10 (D) is different from the embodiment 1 (execution pattern shown in FIG. 9-1 (D)) according to the feature unit 028SH.

FIG. 9-10 (D) shows an execution pattern when the strong pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed after the start of the weak super reach. Specifically, (D) is the "first pseudo-ream" in the order of execution of each fluctuation.
→ "Normal reach"->"Weak super reach"->"Pseudo-ream second time"->"Strong super reach". At the end of the second pseudo-ream, the display result of the identification information is not derived and displayed.

As shown in (D), after the first variation display of the pseudo-ream, normal reach is executed, and then weak super reach is executed. Then, in the weak super reach, the strong pseudo-continuous symbol or the weak pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, before the weak pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the weak fanning effect suggesting that the weak pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped is not executed.
On the other hand, before the strong pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, a strong fanning effect suggesting that the strong pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped may be executed. In addition, the strong fanning effect may not be executed before the strong pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the weak pseudo-continuous symbol from being temporarily stopped and displayed when the strong fanning effect is not executed. Therefore, the strong pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed to the player. You can expect it to be.

Further, as shown in (D), when the strong pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the background image becomes the strong pseudo-ream background for notifying the strong pseudo-ream effect in the second variation display of the pseudo-ream. On the other hand, when the weak pseudo-ream symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the background image becomes a strong pseudo-ream background for notifying the weak pseudo-ream effect in the second variation display of the pseudo-ream. When the second variation display of the pseudo-ream is completed, the strong super reach is executed. At the end of the second pseudo-ream, the display result of the identification information is not derived and displayed.

(An example of the effect determination process related to the pseudo continuous effect performed by the effect control CPU 120)
Next, the process included in the effect determination process shown in step S171 of FIG. 7 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-11. FIG. 9-11 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process (embodiment 2 according to the feature unit 028SH) in which the effect control CPU 120 relates to the pseudo-continuous effect. Figure 9
The flowchart shown in -11 is compared with the flowchart shown in FIG. 9-4, and steps 028SHS201 to 204 (when performing the pseudo-twice special effect, the weak pseudo-continuous symbol and the strong pseudo-continuous symbol are determined and strongly instigated. The point of deciding whether or not to perform the production is different. For this reason,
This point will be described below.

In step 028SHS103 shown in FIG. 9-11, the effect control CPU 120 is
When the determined production pattern is a pseudo-twice special production production pattern (step 028S)
HS103: YES), with reference to the temporary stop symbol determination table described later with reference to FIG. 9-12, the temporary stop symbol (either the weak pseudo-continuous symbol or the strong pseudo-continuous symbol) after the start of the weak super reach is determined. (Step 028SHS201), a temporary stop symbol determination process is executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the determined temporary stop symbol is a strong pseudo-continuous symbol (step 028SHS202). When the determined temporary stop symbol is not a strong pseudo-continuous symbol (step 028SHS202: NO), that is, when the determined temporary stop symbol is a weak pseudo-continuous symbol, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 028SHS109.
On the other hand, when the determined temporary stop symbol is a strong pseudo-continuous symbol (step 028SHS202: Y).
ES), the effect control CPU 120 executes a strong fan effect determination process of whether or not to perform a strong fan effect during the weak super reach with reference to the strong fan effect determination table described later with reference to FIGS. 9-13. (Step 028SHS203).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the result of executing the strong fanning effect determining process, and determines whether or not to execute the strong fanning effect (step 028SHS204). When the strong fanning effect is not executed (step 028SHS204: NO), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to step 028SHS109. On the other hand, when executing a strong fanning effect (step 028)
SHS204: YES), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to step 028SHS105.

(Example of temporary stop symbol determination table)
Next, using FIG. 9-12, a temporary stop symbol determination process (step of FIG. 9-11) for determining a temporary stop symbol (either a weak pseudo-continuous symbol or a strong pseudo-continuous symbol) of weak superreach. An example of the table used in 028SHS201) will be described. Figure 9-12
Is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a temporary stop symbol determination table. The temporary stop symbol determination table is used when it is a variation pattern (either "GS-2" or "GS-4") in which a pseudo-twice special effect is performed.

As shown in FIG. 9-12, the temporary stop symbol determination table includes the "variation pattern", the "effect pattern", the "variation content of the decorative symbol", and the "strong pseudo-continuous symbol" and the weak pseudo-continuous symbol, respectively. "Decision rate" and. "Fluctuation pattern" is "PA20-8 (loss)" and "P"
B20-8 (big hit) ”is indicated. "Direction pattern" is "GS-2" and "
Indicates any of "GS-2". "Variation content of decorative pattern" indicates the transition of each specific variation content of the pseudo-twice special effect. The "decision ratio" indicates the ratio at which each of the strong pseudo-continuous symbol and the weak pseudo-continuous symbol is determined for each effect pattern. It should be noted that the determination of the pseudo-ream pattern is also the determination of the type of the pseudo-ream effect. That is, when the strong pseudo-continuous symbol is determined, the strong pseudo-continuous effect is executed, and when the weak pseudo-continuous symbol is determined, the weak pseudo-continuous effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-12, in the case of the effect pattern "GS-2 (loss)", the weak pseudo-continuous symbol is determined at a rate of 10%, and the strong pseudo-continuous symbol is determined at a rate of 90%. On the other hand, in the case of the effect pattern "GS-4 (big hit)", the weak pseudo-continuous symbol is determined at a rate of 2%, and the strong pseudo-continuous symbol is determined at a rate of 98%.

As described above, in any of the effect patterns, the strong pseudo-continuous pattern is easier to determine than the weak pseudo-continuous pattern. That is, it is unlikely that the weak pseudo-continuous symbol will be temporarily stopped and displayed after the start of the weak super reach in the pseudo-twice special effect. In addition, the strong pseudo-continuous pattern is more likely to be determined in the production pattern "GS-4 (big hit)" than in the production pattern "GS-2 (loss)". That is, it is unlikely that the weak pseudo-continuous symbol will be temporarily stopped and displayed after the start of the weak super reach in the pseudo two-time special effect in which the display result of the big hit is derived and displayed.

(An example of a strong fanning production decision table)
Next, using FIG. 9-13, a strong fanning effect determination process (step 028SH of FIG. 9-11) is used to determine whether or not to perform a strong fanning effect when temporarily stopping and displaying the strong pseudo-continuous symbol after the start of the weak super reach.
An example of the table used in S203) will be described. FIG. 9-13 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a strong fanning effect determination table.

The strong fanning effect determination table includes a "big hit determination result" and a "strong fanning effect determination ratio". The "big hit judgment result" indicates a loss and a big hit. "Decision ratio of strong fan production" is
It includes "yes" indicating that the strong fanning effect is executed and "none" indicating that the strong fanning effect is not executed. As shown in FIG. 9-13, in the case of loss, "yes" of the strong fanning effect is determined at a rate of 70%, and "no" of the strong fanning effect is determined at a rate of 30%. Further, in the case of a big hit, "yes" of the strong fanning effect is determined at a rate of 95%, and "no" of the strong fanning effect is determined at a rate of 5%.

In this way, in both cases of loss and big hit, it is easy to determine the “presence” of the strong fanning effect. That is, there is a high possibility that the strong fanning effect will be executed after the start of the weak super reach in the pseudo two-time special effect. In addition, it is easier to determine the presence or absence of a strong fanning effect in the case of a big hit than in the case of a loss. That is, when the strong pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed after the start of the weak super reach in the pseudo two-time special effect in which the display result of the big hit is derived and displayed, the strong fanning effect is performed in most cases.

(Example of screen transition of variable display with pseudo-continuous production)
Next, an example of a screen transition of a variable display accompanied by a pseudo-continuous effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 9-14. FIG. 9-14 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a screen transition of the pseudo-twice special effect in which the weak pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. Note that FIG. 9-9 describes the screen transition of the pseudo-twice special effect (effect pattern GS-2 of FIG. 9-5) when the display result of the big hit is derived and displayed.

FIG. 9-14 (A) is the same screen as FIG. 9-7 (A), and shows the screen at the start of the first variation display of the pseudo-ream. In (A), when a predetermined time (for example, 12 seconds) elapses, (
The screen transitions to the screen shown in B).

FIG. 9-14 (B) shows a normal reach screen. When it is time to end the normal reach, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (C).

FIG. 9-14 (C) shows a screen of weak super reach. The plurality of notices shown by the target image 028SH141 include "re" indicating that pseudo-continuous production (re-variation) is performed, unlike (F) in FIG. 9-7 and (F) in FIG. 9-8. There is. Target image 0 in weak super reach
In 28SH141, "re" may allow for different display modes. For example, there are blue and red display colors for "re", and the strong pseudo-continuous symbol may be more easily displayed as a temporary stop in the red display mode than in the blue display mode.

FIG. 9-14 (D) shows a screen in the case where the strong fanning effect is not performed during the weak super reach. Also, during the weak super reach, no weak fanning effect is performed. This is because, after developing to a weak super reach, the player expects a strong pseudo-continuous production, and if the weak fanning production is performed, the player's expectation may decrease. In addition, in (D), an effect different from the strong fanning effect may be performed. For example, in (D), a fanning effect suggesting that the strong pseudo-continuous symbol may be temporarily stopped and the weak pseudo-continuous symbol may be temporarily stopped may be displayed.

In (D), when the character indicated by the character image 028SH140 shoots "re" out of the notice indicated by the target image 028SH141, the strong pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH22
It will be foretold that 0 will be displayed as a temporary stop after that. And the weak pseudo series pattern 028S
When it is time to temporarily stop the H120, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (E).

FIG. 9-14 (E) shows a screen when the weak pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH120 is temporarily stopped and displayed, similarly to FIG. 9-7 (C). At the timing when the weak super reach shown in (E) ends, the weak pseudo-ream symbol 028SH120 temporarily stops and displays, so that the weak pseudo-reach effect is performed after the weak super reach. The movable body 32 does not operate when the weak pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH 120 temporarily stops and displays (see (C) in FIG. 9-7). After that, the screen transitions to the screen shown in (F).

Fluctuation patterns ending with weak super reach (fluctuation patterns "PA20-2", "
In the case of "PB20-2"), the display result indicating the loss is derived and displayed at the timing of the temporary stop display of the weak pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH120 in (E). In the case of this non-reach loss fluctuation pattern without shortening, a strong fanning effect (a strong fanning effect) may be performed, but a weak fanning effect is not performed.

FIG. 9-14 (F) shows a screen of a weak pseudo-ream effect for the second pseudo-ream, similar to (D) of FIG. 9-7. Also in FIG. 9-14 (F), a background image indicating that the effect is a weak pseudo-continuous effect is displayed. This background image is continuously displayed until the decorative symbol 028SH100 is in the reach mode again.

When it is time to end the second pseudo-ream (62 seconds after the start of fluctuation), (
The screen transitions to the screen shown in G). The timing at which the second pseudo-ream ends (6 from the start of fluctuation)
At the timing when 2 seconds have passed), the display result is not derived and displayed, and the reach mode (strong super reach) is always set.

(G) of FIG. 9-14 shows a screen of strong super reach similar to (G) of FIG. 9-9.

FIG. 9-14 (H) shows a loss notification screen similar to FIG. 9-7 (H).

As described above, in the second embodiment according to the feature unit 028SH, the weak pseudo continuous effect can be executed even after the start of the weak super reach. As a result, when a weak pseudo-continuous production is performed after the start of the weak super reach, the strong super reach is executed, but the jackpot expectation of this variable display is not so high, but it has developed to the strong super reach. , The player can play with a little hope. In addition, when the strong pseudo-continuous production is executed after the start of the weak super reach, the joy of the player can be further enhanced.

Further, in the second embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH, the strong fanning effect can be executed before and after the start of the weak super reach (FIGS. 9-8 and 9-9), while the weak fanning effect is performed. Regarding the production, although it is executed before the start of the weak super reach, it is not executed after the start of the weak super reach (FIGS. 9-7 and 9-14). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being overly expected when performing the weak pseudo-continuous production after the start of the weak super reach.

Further, in the second embodiment according to the feature unit 028SH, even if the strong fanning effect is not performed after the start of the weak super reach, the strong pseudo-ream symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed, so that the player can perform the pseudo-ream. Until the timing of the temporary stop display of the symbol, the game can be played by wishing for the temporary stop display of the strong pseudo-continuous symbol.

(Modification 1 of the second embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH)
Next, a modification 1 of the second embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH will be described. In the second embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH described above, the weak pseudo-continuous symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed after the start of the weak super reach and the start of the normal reach before the start of the weak super reach (in the second embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH). The configuration in which the weak pseudo-continuous symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the previous) has the same display mode has been described. In the first modification of the second embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH, in place of or in addition to such a configuration, a weak pseudo-continuous symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed after the start of the weak super reach is used. The weak pseudo-continuous symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed before the start of the weak super reach may be displayed in a different mode.

Specifically, for example, the weak pseudo-continuous symbol 02 that is temporarily stopped and displayed after the start of the weak super reach.
8SH120 and weak pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH that is temporarily stopped before the start of weak super reach
The size of the symbol may be different from that of 120, or the character attached to the symbol may be different. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the weak pseudo-continuous production. In addition, although the jackpot expectation of the weak pseudo-continuous production (pseudo two-time special production) performed after the start of the weak super reach is not so high, the player can play with a slight hope.

(Modification 2 of the second embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH)
Next, a modification 2 of the second embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH will be described. In the second embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH described above, the background image of the strong pseudo-continuous effect performed after the start of the weak super reach and the background image of the strong pseudo-continuous effect performed before the start of the weak super reach are obtained.
The configuration having the same display mode has been described. In the second modification of the second embodiment according to the feature unit 028SH, in place of or in addition to such a configuration, a background image of a weak pseudo-continuous effect performed after the start of the weak super reach is used. The background image of the weak pseudo-continuous effect performed before the start of the weak super reach may be displayed differently.

Specifically, for example, the size of the image showing the moon in the background image of the weak pseudo-continuous effect performed after the start of the weak super reach and the background image of the weak pseudo-continuous effect performed before the start of the weak super reach. May be different images, or images with different numbers of clouds may be used. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the weak pseudo-continuous production. In addition, although the jackpot expectation of the weak pseudo-continuous production (pseudo two-time special production) performed after the start of the weak super reach is not so high, the player can play with a slight hope.

(Modification 3 of the second embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH)
Next, a modification 3 of the second embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH will be described. In the second embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH described above, the configuration in which the weak super reach is one type has been described. In the third modification of the second embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH, a plurality of types of weak super reach may be provided in place of or in addition to such a configuration.

For example, it is sufficient to prepare a plurality of weak super reach with different jackpot expectations. Specifically, a first weak super reach and a second weak super reach, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the first weak super reach, may be prepared. Further, in the case of the second weak super reach, the strong pseudo continuous effect (temporary stop display of the strong pseudo continuous symbol or the strong fan effect) may be performed more easily than in the case of the first weak super reach. Further, in the case of the first weak super reach, the weak pseudo continuous effect (temporary stop display of the weak pseudo continuous symbol) may be performed more easily than in the case of the second weak super reach.

This makes it possible to perform weak super reach with different jackpot expectations. Therefore, since the production can be developed step by step until the weak super reach is reached, the interest in the weak super reach can be improved. In addition, depending on the type of weak super reach, there is a high possibility that a strong pseudo-ream effect (temporary stop display of a strong pseudo-ream symbol or a strong fanning effect) will be performed after that, or a weak pseudo-ream effect (weak pseudo-ream pattern). Since it is possible to suggest whether or not there is a high possibility that a temporary stop display) will be performed, it is possible to improve the interest of weak super reach.

(Modification 4 of the second embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH)
Next, a modification 4 of the second embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH will be described. In the second embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH described above, the configuration in which the strong super reach is one type has been described. In the modified example 4 of the second embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH, a plurality of types of strong super reach may be used instead of or in addition to such a configuration.

For example, it is sufficient to prepare a plurality of strong super reach with different jackpot expectations. Specifically, the first strong super reach and the second strong super reach, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the first strong super reach, may be prepared. Also, compared to when a strong pseudo-ream effect (temporary stop display of a strong pseudo-reach pattern or a strong fanning effect) is performed before the start of the weak super reach, a strong pseudo-ream effect (strong pseudo-reach pattern) is performed after the start of the weak super reach. It suffices to make it easier to develop into the second strong super reach when the temporary stop display and the strong fanning effect) are performed.

As a result, it is possible to execute a strong super reach with different jackpot expectations. Therefore, since the production can be developed step by step until reaching the strong super reach, it is possible to improve the interest of reaching the strong super reach. Also, after the start of the weak super reach, is there a strong pseudo-ream effect (temporary stop display of the strong pseudo-ream symbol or a strong fan effect) or a weak pseudo-ream effect (temporary stop display of the weak pseudo-ream symbol)? By, it is possible to suggest which strong super reach is likely to develop, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the pseudo-continuous production.

(Modification 5 of the second embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH)
Next, a modification 5 of the second embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH will be described. In the second embodiment according to the above-mentioned feature unit 028SH, the pseudo-continuous symbol (strong pseudo-continuous symbol or weak pseudo-continuous symbol) is temporarily stopped and displayed before the start of the normal reach before the start of the weak super reach. explained. In the modified example 5 of the second embodiment according to the feature unit 028SH, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, as a timing for temporarily stopping and displaying the pseudo-continuous symbol before the start of the weak super reach. , May be after the start of normal reach. It should be noted that the configuration in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed before the start of the weak super reach after the start of the normal reach is the same as the configuration shown in the modified example 6 of the first embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH. Therefore, detailed description will be omitted.

(Modification 6 of the second embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH)
Next, a modification 6 of the second embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH will be described. In the second embodiment according to the feature unit 028SH described above, a configuration has been described in which a pseudo-continuous symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed after the start of the weak super reach in the pseudo-twice special effect is determined regardless of the set value. In the modified example 6 of the second embodiment according to the feature portion 028SH, in place of or in addition to such a configuration, a pseudo stop display is displayed after the start of the weak super reach in the pseudo two-time special effect. The continuous symbol may be determined according to the set value.

Specifically, the determination ratio shown in the temporary stop symbol determination table (FIG. 9-12) may be changed according to the set value. For example, in the case of a high setting (for example, a set value of 5 or more), in either case of the effect pattern "GS-2 (loss)" and the effect pattern "GS-4 (big hit)", the weak pseudo-continuous pattern is higher than the weak pseudo-continuous pattern. The determination rate of the strong pseudo-continuous symbol may be increased. As a result, in the case of a high setting, it is possible to easily produce a rare case at the time of a big hit. in this way,
By determining the pseudo-continuous symbol (pseudo-continuous effect) to be temporarily stopped and displayed after the start of the weak super reach according to the set value, the set value can be suggested by the pseudo-continuous symbol to be temporarily stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Explanation of Means Concerning Feature 028SH)
In relation to the above-mentioned feature unit 028SH, there is a pachinko gaming machine in which a pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed again in a variable manner during super reach executed after normal reach (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-051230). ). However, if the weak pseudo-continuous symbol and the strong pseudo-continuous symbol can be temporarily stopped when the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed during a specific reach, there is room for improvement in order to enhance the interest.

(Means 1)
Therefore, the gaming machine of the means 1 according to the feature unit 028SH is
A gaming machine that can execute variable display of identification information (for example, first special symbol, second special symbol, decorative symbol, etc.) and control it to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game state).
For example, a pachinko machine 1)
A variable display executing means (for example, a portion that executes steps S110 to 113 of the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing variable display of identification information is provided.
The execution pattern of the variation display includes a re-variation pattern in which the identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed again (for example, a variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous effect is performed).
When the variation display executing means executes the re-variation pattern, the first special identification information (
For example, when the weak pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH120) of FIG. 9-7 is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the first
The second special identification information (for example,) having a higher expectation of being controlled in the advantageous state than the special identification information.
There are times when the strong pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH220) of FIG. 9-8 is temporarily stopped and displayed.
The first special identification information may be temporarily stopped and displayed before the start of a predetermined reach effect (for example, weak super reach) (for example, the strong pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH220 of FIG. 9-7 (C)).
Temporary stop display), there is no time to temporarily stop display after the start of the predetermined reach effect,
The second special identification information is displayed when a temporary stop is displayed before the start of the predetermined reach effect (for example, a temporary stop display of the strong pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH220 of FIG. 9-8 (C)) and the predetermined reach. When the temporary stop is displayed after the start of the effect (for example, the strong pseudo-continuous symbol 0 in (E) of FIG. 9-9)
(Temporary stop display of 28SH220).

According to such a configuration, even if a configuration using a plurality of types of identification information that triggers re-variation, the first special identification information is not temporarily stopped and displayed after the start of a predetermined reach effect, so that the effect progresses. It is possible to suppress the production without a sense of expectation. Further, since it is possible to temporarily stop and display only the second special identification information after the start of the predetermined reach effect, it is possible to gradually develop the effect with a sense of expectation. As a result, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation that the game state is controlled after the start of the predetermined reach effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means 2)
Further, as the game machine of the means 2 according to the feature unit 028SH, in the game machine described in the means 1.
A production execution means (for example, a production control CPU 120) capable of executing the production is provided.
The effect executing means includes a first suggestion effect (for example, a weakening effect of FIG. 9-7 (B)) suggesting that the first special identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the second special identification information. It is possible to execute a second suggestion effect (for example, a strong fan effect of (B) in FIG. 9-8) that suggests that is temporarily stopped.
Before the start of the predetermined reach effect, the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect can be executed.
After the start of the predetermined reach effect, the first suggestion effect is not executed, and the second suggestion effect (
It is possible to carry out the strong fanning effect of FIG. 9-9 (D).

According to such a configuration, the first suggestion effect is not performed after the start of the predetermined reach effect.
It is possible to suppress excessive expectations of the player, and to temporarily stop and display the second special identification information after performing the second suggestion effect after the start of the predetermined reach effect, so that the effect has a sense of expectation. , It will be possible to develop in more stages. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means 3)
Further, as the game machine of the means 3 according to the feature unit 028SH, in the game machine according to the means 1 or 2.
As the effects to be executed after the identification information is in the reach state, at least the first reach effect (for example, the normal reach shown in FIG. 9-8 (E)) and the effect executed after the first reach effect and said to be the first. Includes a second reach effect (for example, the weak super reach shown in FIG. 9-8 (F)), which is more expected to be controlled in the advantageous state than the first reach effect.
The predetermined reach effect is the second reach effect.

According to such a configuration, since the first special identification information is not temporarily stopped and displayed after the start of the second reach effect, it is possible to suppress an effect without a sense of expectation as the effect progresses. Further, since it is possible to temporarily stop and display only the second special identification information after the start of the second reach effect, the first reach effect → the second reach effect → the temporary stop display of the second special identification information, and so on. It will be possible to gradually develop the production with a sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means 4)
Further, as the game machine of the means 4 according to the feature unit 028SH, in the game machine described in the means 3.
As an effect executed after the identification information is in the reach state, a third reach effect (for example,) that is executed after the second reach effect and has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the second reach effect (for example). Including the strong super reach) shown in (G) of FIG. 9-7.
When the first special identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed before the start of the second reach effect (for example, the temporarily stopped display of the weak pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH120 shown in FIG. 9-7 (C)), after the variable display is performed again. , The rate at which the identification information is stopped and displayed (the display result is derived and displayed at the end of the normal reach shown in FIG. 9-7 (E)) without executing the second reach effect executes the third reach effect. The identification information is stopped and displayed (for example, the display result is derived and displayed at the end of the strong super reach shown in FIG. 9-7 (H)) (as shown in FIG. 9-6, the fluctuation of the normal reach). Patterns "PA20-5 (loss)", "PB20-5 (big hit)" and weak super reach fluctuation patterns "PA20-6 (loss)", "PB20-6 (big hit)"
In the case of, the ratio of weak pseudo-continuous symbols determined is higher than that of strong pseudo-continuous symbols. ).

According to such a configuration, it can be suggested that when the first special identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed before the start of the second reach effect, it is difficult to develop into the third reach effect. That is, the first
By temporarily stopping the special identification information, it can be suggested that the jackpot expectation is low. Therefore, by not temporarily stopping and displaying the first special identification information after the start of the second reach effect, it is possible to prevent an effect that cannot be expected from the subsequent development of the effect from being performed as the effect progresses. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means 5)
Further, as the game machine of the means 5 according to the feature unit 028SH, in the game machine according to the means 3 or 4.
As an effect executed after the identification information is in the reach state, a third reach effect (for example,) that is executed after the second reach effect and has a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the second reach effect (for example). Including the strong super reach) shown in (G) of FIG. 9-8.
When the second special identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed before the start of the second reach effect (for example, the temporary stop display of the strong pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH220 shown in FIG. 9-8 (C)), after the variable display is performed again. , The identification information is stopped and displayed by executing the third reach effect (for example, (for example, in FIG. 9-8).
The ratio of deriving and displaying the display result at the end of the strong super reach shown in H) is the second
The identification information is higher than the rate at which the identification information is stopped and displayed (the display result is derived and displayed at the end of the normal reach shown in FIG. 9-8 (E)) without executing the reach effect (as shown in FIG. 9-6, the strong supermarket is displayed). Fluctuation patterns that develop into reach "PA20-7 (loss)", "PA20-8 (loss)"
In the case of "PB20-7 (big hit)" and "PB20-8 (big hit)", the ratio of strong pseudo-continuous symbols determined is higher than that of weak pseudo-continuous symbols. ).

According to such a configuration, it can be suggested that when the second special identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed before the start of the second reach effect, it is likely to develop into the third reach effect. That is, the second
By temporarily stopping the special identification information, it can be suggested that the display is a variable display with a high expectation of a big hit. Therefore, by temporarily stopping and displaying only the second special identification information after the start of the second reach effect, it is possible to expect the subsequent development of the effect as the effect progresses. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means 6)
Further, as the game machine of the means 6 according to the feature unit 028SH, in the game machine according to any one of the means 2 to 5.
The second special identification information is temporarily stopped before the start of the second reach effect (for example, FIG. 9-).
The temporary stop display (for example, the strong pseudo-continuous symbol shown in FIG. 9-9 (C)) is displayed after the start of the second reach effect, as compared with the case where the strong pseudo-continuous symbol 028SH220 shown in (C) of 8 is temporarily stopped. 02
The expectation that the advantageous state will be controlled is higher when the 8SH220 is temporarily stopped (temporary stop display).
As shown in FIG. 9-5, the production pattern "GS-1 (pseudo 2 times normal production)" when lost.
Is easy to determine, and it is difficult to determine the effect pattern "GS-3 (pseudo-twice normal effect)" at the time of a big hit. Further, it is easy to determine the effect pattern "GS-4 (pseudo 2 times special effect)" at the time of a big hit, and it is difficult to determine the effect pattern "GS-2 (pseudo 2 times special effect)" at the time of loss. ).

According to such a configuration, the temporary stop display of the second special identification information after the start of the second reach effect can be an effect with a high expectation of a big hit, and the first reach effect → the second reach effect → the second The development mode of temporarily stopping and displaying the special identification information can be the development mode with the highest expectation for a big hit. Therefore, it is possible to gradually raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General winning opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Ordinary symbol display 21 ... Gate switches 22A, 22B ... Starting port Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuits 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can execute variable display of identification information and control it to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
Equipped with a variable display execution means that can execute variable display of identification information
The execution pattern of the variation display includes a re-variation pattern in which the identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed again.
The variable display executing means is
When the revariation pattern is executed, when the first special identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed, and when the second special identification information, which is more expected to be controlled in the advantageous state than the first special identification information, is temporarily stopped. When to display, there is,
The first special identification information may be temporarily stopped before the start of the predetermined reach effect, and may not be temporarily stopped after the start of the predetermined reach effect.
The second special identification information may be temporarily stopped before the start of the predetermined reach effect or temporarily stopped after the start of the predetermined reach effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

Images